Home

Security Escort 2.15 Training Manual

1. The transmitter is a miniature hand held radio transmitter used to transmit either a distress or atest signal The receivers are located throughout the protected area and detect the radio transmissions from transmitters Alert units are siren strobe units activated in the event of an alarm Transponders are devices that control groups of receivers and alert units connected to them by wire Each transponder relays alarm and test signals from its receivers to the Central Console In addition the transponder tests for device and wiring faults and transmits problem conditions to the Central Console The Central Console consists of a computer plus an optional backup and up to 8 optional workstations which receives alarm and trouble signals from the transponders analyzes the signals activates strobes and sirens on the alert units and produces a display for the Security dispatcher Each of these system elements is described more fully in the sections that follow Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 10 en System overview 1 8 Security Escort Compatible parts The following table indicates the parts available for inclusion in a Security Escort system Contact Bosch Security Systems Customer Service for up to date model numbers Part Name Description Electronics Components EA500 Electronics for eight bus transponder EA102 Electronics for indoor or outdoor receiver
2. Table 7 2 Transponder communication with ProxLink Transponder communication with Moxa Lantronix device Symptoms Probable Cause Possible Solutions Communication failures from all transponders Loss of power Check power to Moxa Lantronix device Cable from Moxa device to transponder Must use standard 9 pin female to 9 pin male cable Cable from Lantronix device to transponder Must use modified 25 pin male to 9 pin male cable Refer to the Lantronix wiring notes Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 104 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units 7 3 4 Symptoms Probable Cause Security Escort Possible Solutions Moxa Lantronix device might not be running Unplug power to Moxa Lantronix device and plug back in to restart Moxa Lantronix device Cable from Moxa Lantronix device to Ethernet network Check Ethernet cable between Moxa Lantronix device and Ethernet network Replace if cable is bad Table 7 3 Transponder communication with Moxa Lantronix device EA500 transponder bus faults Symptoms Probable Cause Possible Solutions Bus failure Bus power jumper not in place Place jumper on for corresponding bus see the transponder s nstallation Instructions for location of jumper Short or open on the bus wires Put meter ac
3. 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Pager ID Pager Groups Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 137 This is the ID that identifies the pager to receive the pager message many times this value is the last 7 digits that would be manually dialed to access this pager The pager ID is assigned by the paging service These are the pager groups that this subscriber is a member of This subscriber may be a member of up to 3 different pager groups Pager Confirmation Not If checked the confirmation pager message is not sent to this pager Required Fixed location transmitter Floor level Map X Position Map Y Position Locate Map number Enable reed switch Optional text Disable on shorted loop if alarm is acknowledged by an acknowledgement transmitter This section is to be used only when this transmitter is mounted ina fixed location it does not move When this transmitter transmits and alarm it will always be reported at the programmed location This is the floor level where this alarm is to be located for a fixed location transmitter This is the X coordinate of the map position where this alarm is to be located for a fixed location transmitter This is the Y coordinate of the map position where this alarm is to be located for a fixed location transmitter When clicked the dialog will disappear and the cursor will cha
4. 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Network Port None COM 1 COM 2 COM 3 COM 4 COM 5 COM 6 COM 7 COM 8 COM 9 COM 10 COM 11 COM 12 COM 13 COM 14 COM 15 COM 16 Central Console computer setup and programming en 71 r Edit The System Remote Communication Port Assignments 4 Modem Port System Serial 1 System Serial 2 None COM 1 COM 2 COM 3 COM 4 COM 5 COM 6 COM 7 COM 8 COM 9 COM 10 COM 11 COM 12 COM 13 COM 14 COM 15 COM 16 None COM 1 COM 2 COM 3 COM 4 COM 5 COM 6 COM 7 COM 8 COM 9 COM 10 COM 11 COM 12 COM 13 COM 14 COM 15 COM 16 None COM 1 COM 2 COM 3 COM 4 COM 5 COM 6 COM 7 COM 8 COM 9 COM 10 COM 11 COM 12 COM 13 COM 14 COM 15 COM 16 1 200 baud 2 400 4 800 9 600 19 200 38 400 1 200 2 400 4 800 9 600 19 200 38 400 baud 1 200 baud 2 400 4 800 9 600 19 200 38 400 1 200 baud 2 400 4 800 9 600 19 200 38 400 CR LF CR only LF only G C Co C 2 2 f K c O 2 te C C e Oe ie oe ee ie e e ies ies eie es ee ies ie io CRLF CR only LF only CR LF CR only LF only CR LF LF only e Oo ee Oie ee ie eie HR LIER o e IE ID o e o e o Q 9 0 N ME iN ME ME MG ie o IE iC Figure 6 2 Remote Comm Port Setup Dialog Network Port Modem Port System Serial 1 2 COM This port
5. Remove jumpers P4 P5 P6 and P7 for normal operation Test mode The module goes into test mode when jumper P4 is in place jumper P5 removed In this mode all test and alarm receptions will be sounded Notice The sounder and LEDs jumpers P1 P2 and P3 must also be enabled to operate the test mode Each receiver should be tested using the following method test only one receiver at a time 1 Enable the test mode by placing the jumper P4 across both pins jumper P5 removed The red LED will turn ON and stay ON during the test Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 42 en System wiring 2 Security Escort The green LED will flicker if the receiver is connected to a working transponder There will be no data transmitted to the central station The central station will receive a not responding failure Activate the transmitter from at least five different locations near the receiver The LEDs will respond to a received transmission Ifthe receiver detected all the packets from the transmission the sounder will beep three times If the receiver detected the transmission but some of the packets were missing it will beep once This could indicate that the signal is not sufficient from this location Testing receiver spacing Receiver spacing mode is enabled with jumper P5 in place jumper P4 removed This mode is exactly the same as the
6. Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 128 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units ee Edit Subscriber s Database Re Security Escort Transmitter Type transmitter Subscriber Type Security Disability No handicap M Disabled Silent Supervision Duration so Seconds Name Sgt John Young Addr Security Department EE City State Zip Phone 1911 r Home Name Sgt John Young Addr 21 Oak St City Rochester State NY Zip D 4604 Phone 716 244 4301 Subscriber ID J063 24 091 8 Transmitter ID 000000033 New ID Alarm zone V Zone 1 V Zone 3 V Zone 4 M Watchdog MM Zone 2 Alarm Background Color Male C Female Height 6 feet 2 inches Build Large Hair color Blak x Eye color Browns Image IMAGE3 Browse Advanced Information Save Figure 7 11 Edit Subscriber s Database Record Transmitter 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Transmitter Type Subscriber Type Disability Disabled Silent Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 129 Click the drop down list to select the type of transmitter that is assigned to the subscriber Currently only the standard transmitter is supported Click the drop down list sel
7. is not at a barrier where is it important to resolve which side an alarm location is on is easy to service and will not be damaged by tampering Wiring Notice Apply power only after all connections have been made and inspected Connect wiring as shown Multiplex Loop Wiring Transponder BUS Typical i Receiver POWER To Next Device 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort 4 4 4 System wiring en 41 Switches and jumpers Loop address The rotary switch is used to select the loop address This is the address that is reported to the transponder which the receiver is connected to Each device on a loop should have its own address Only addresses 0 through 7 are valid Do not use addresses 8 and 9 Address Figure 4 5 Address Switch There are two groups of jumpers on the EA102A 304 Receiver The first group contains jumpers P1 through P3 The second contains jumpers P4 through P8 The function of each jumper is indicated in the table below Jumper Operation with Jumper in Place P1 Sounder is enabled P2 Green LED is enabled P3 Red LED is enabled P4 Test Mode is enabled P5 Receiver Spacing Mode is enabled P6 Left Antenna is disabled Pr Right Antenna is disabled P8 Do not place a jumper across these pins Notice Remove jumpers P1 P2 and P3 when installed in an outdoor enclosure
8. Close lightning hit Power down transponder and restart If this does not work replace transponder Bad transponder Replace transponder Table 7 1 Transponder communications with SE485 bus Transponder communication with ProxLink Symptoms Probable Cause Possible Solutions Communication failures from all transponders Loss of power Cable from ProxLink to computer Check power to ProxLink from Central Console Also if using SE485 check power to SE485 module Must use 25 to 9 pin cable supplied from Proxim ProxLink Radio Module might be in Programming Mode Unplug power to ProxLink and plug back in to re start ProxLink SE485 Module Check wiring between SE485 and computer and SE485 at ProxLink Radio Module Transmit should be going to receive and receive should be going to transmit RX to TX RX to TX Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 102 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units Symptoms Probable Cause Security Escort Possible Solutions Cable from SE485 Cable from SE485 to computer must be straight through 25 pin to 25 pin or 25 pin to 9 pin depending on your serial port on the back of the computer Do not use cable labeled for printer or null modem cable Replace cable if bad Check cable between SE485 and ProxLink Radio Module Replace if ba
9. If checked the software will not ask for a password when the user switches to another program and then switches back to the still running Security Escort Normally this checkbox is not checked If checked the software will not ask for a password after the screen saver kicks in Normally this checkbox is not checked If checked the software will jump to the front when a new alarm occurs Normally this checkbox is checked If checked the software will jump to the front when a trouble dialog pops up Normally this checkbox is checked If checked whenever there is an unacknowledged alarm the siren output on the control room output indicated below will operate If checked whenever there is an unacknowledged alarm the strobe output on the control room output indicated below will operate If checked whenever there is an unacknowledged alarm the spare output on the control room output indicated below will operate If the Security Escort System is intended to be the only application running on this computer leave this checkbox unchecked This will prevent other applications from taking over the screen The Security Escort System will always be present If the Security Escort System is to be run on a computer with other applications check this checkbox and it will share the computer s display like all other Windows applications After checking this checkbox stop and restart the Security Escort System for this feature to t
10. Output includes subscriber If this checkbox is checked then any time the system prints or ID displays text for an alarm or test the subscriber s ID number will also be displayed Otherwise the subscriber s ID will not be shown Output includes transmitter If this checkbox is checked then any time the system prints or ID displays text for an alarm or test the transmitter ID number will also be displayed Otherwise the transmitter ID will not be shown Typically this checkbox would not be checked Limit alarms to 1 This checkbox should not be checked It was used only ina transponder system where all transponders operate on areas that are separate from each other It would prevent all interactions between receivers on different transponders Typically this would be very undesirable and there is now a selection on an individual transponder basis to accomplish this feature Limit alarms to one area This checkbox should not be checked It is used only in a system where all transponders operate on areas that are separate from each other Man down Alarm On Auto If this checkbox is checked then any time there is a man down track alarm the auto track functionality will be activated Otherwise there is no auto track functionality for the alarm 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Require alarm report Security alarms silent Installer alarms silent Alarm voice output Show
11. 304 equipment Mounting Normally the enclosures are mounted first and all the wiring run then the electronics are mounted wired and tested The enclosures come with their own mounting hardware H500 Hardware Kit for mounting the enclosure to a wall and mounting the circuit board to the enclosure Mount the enclosure to the mounting surface Mount the circuit board to the enclosure Wiring Wire the transponder See wiring diagram on Set the address page 37 Wiring to receivers and alert units can be home run individual daisy chain from device to device or a combination of both T tapping is okay The recommended cable is 4 conductor 18 AWG 1 2 mm fire rated Wiring from SE485 to transponders can be home run individual daisy chain from device to device or a combination of both T tapping is okay The recommended cable is 4 conductor 22 AWG 0 8 mm 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort System wiring en 37 4 3 5 Set the address Every transponder in the system must have its own address Set the address on the transponder using the dip switches in the upper right corner See figure below Com Fa z Ae Sten 2 12VOC OSA Curen Shk ae mas z aa n ma 12 VOC OS ACurent Srk RE hogea Mar n rogas P Tamor me 7 o c e o e gt o o o o o o reyna SV Fado Fower Figure 4 2 Transponder Robert Bosch SEA Pte L
12. Point 4 Point 5 Point 6 Point 7 Bus 2 Locations Point 0 Point 1 Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 34 en System wiring Point 2 Security Escort Point 3 Point 4 Point 5 Point 6 Point 7 Bus 3 Locations Point 0 Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Point 4 Point 5 Point 6 Point 7 Bus 4 Locations Point 0 Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Point 4 Point 5 Point 6 Point 7 Bus 5 Locations Point 0 Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Point 4 Point 5 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Point 6 System wiring en 35 Point 7 Bus 6 Locations Point 0 Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Point 4 Point 5 Point 6 Point 7 Bus 7 Locations Point 0 Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Point 4 Point 5 Point 6 Point 7 Location of Splices Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 36 en System wiring Security Escort 4 3 4 3
13. Show all error pop ups Disable auto reconnect Auto synchronize time Comm fail reset Master s Network Address Master s Network Listen Port Slave s Network Address Slave s Network Listen Port System menus and dialogs en 211 If this option is not checked the master and all the slave and workstation computers share the same database files This checkbox must only be checked if each computer has its own copy of the databases stored locally In normal operation this checkbox is typically unchecked If this checkbox is checked the databases must be manually updated using Backup and Restore every time changes are made to the database If this option is checked it will display a pop up message box whenever a network connection is initiated or released with another computer Unchecking this checkbox stops the message boxes from displaying In normal operation this checkbox is typically unchecked If this option is checked it will display a pop up message box whenever a network error is reported Unchecking this checkbox stops the message boxes from displaying In normal operation this checkbox is typically unchecked If this option is checked the system will not automatically attempt to reconnect a lost connection each minute Unchecking this checkbox allows the system to automatically reconnect a lost connection In normal operation this checkbox should be unchecked If this option is checked the master computer
14. Trouble on open loop Alarm when armed Trouble when disarmed on open loop E c c c B c c c Fixed location and pager text Transponder name Transponder rea 0 4 Alarm Group Not Used EE Ere l Requires Check in Figure 7 13 Fixed Location Dialog Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 134 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units Security Escort 7 10 6 Different paging companies and they may require different baud rates Set the baud rate to the highest baud rate common to all of the paging companies to be accessed The Character limit characters per page Pages per call affect all pages of the indicated type local and dial up These fields must be set to the lowest setting for any of the routes that may be used Remember that dial up pages may be routed to different paging companies and they may have different restrictions Subscriber individual Pager Setup In the Subscriber Database select the record for the desired individual Click the Edit Data button followed by the Advanced button The dialog below will be displayed Edit Subscriber s Advanced Features o _ Fixed location transmitter Phone number Floor level Floor 1 Pager password Map X Position 624 Locate Pager ID Map Y Position 234 Pager Groups Map number o Pager Confirmation Not Requried Enable reed switch Optional text Stor
15. Security Escort Point 7 Bus 6 Locations Point 0 Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Point 4 Point 5 Point 6 Point 7 Bus 7 Locations Point 0 Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Point 4 Point 5 Point 6 Point 7 Location of Splices 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort 6 4 2 Central Console computer setup and programming en 79 Transponder Database dialog The Transponder Database is established at system set up and contains all necessary configuration data for each transponder receiver and alert unit It describes the basic structure of the installation including all device names locations types multiplex addresses etc This information is used by the Central Console to generate alarm and test displays on the Central Console and in determining which alert units are to be activated Find Transponder s Database Record Transponder Data Record size 5864 bytes version 7 Type transponder Created 17 04 Mon May 18 2015 Name TP A10 3 rr Modified IDI3 Radio IDO Modify Oper 4 Comm Mode TcP IP IP Address 10 123 43 111 Port No 4651 Isolate From All Other Transponders For Location Ignore Communications Failure MUX Point Data Point Type Import Export Point Num
16. System menus and dialogs en 219 The amount of time spent to process each test report from a transponder The amount of time spent to process each trouble and other message reports from a transponder The amount of time spent to compute an alarm location The number of passes through the tick time processor that occurred in an hour The number of passes through the idle time processor that occurred in an hour Displays the serial number of this Security Escort System installation as read from the software key Displays the maximum number of users that this Security Escort System installation allows This number is programmed into the software key Displays the maximum number of transponders that this Security Escort System installation allows This number is programmed into the software key Displays the maximum number of workstations that this Security Escort System installation allows This number is programmed into the software key Resets all of the max timers Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 220 en Files required for Security Escort 9 Files required for Security Escort The following files must be in the same directory as ESC32 EXE default C ESCORT Files Description Esc32 exe the main program Bwcec32 dll support for the dialog appearance Cdrvdl32 dll communications support Cdrvhf32 dll communications support Cdrvxf32 dll
17. The receiver can be forced to use only the left or right antenna or always switch by selecting the appropriate setting and clicking the Antenna button 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort System menus and dialogs en 199 Ant map Clicking the Ant map button causes the system to interrogate the current antenna switching settings of all receivers on this transponder Reset point Clicking the Reset point causes the microprocessors on this point to reset as if they were just powered up A receiver should not be reset in a working system as it can cause receptions to be lost Transmit Clicking the Transmit button causes this receiver to send one test transmission Ambient Clicking the Ambient button causes the system to interrogate the current ambient levels of all receivers on this transponder Revision Clicking the Revision button causes the system to interrogate the RF micro revision levels of all receivers on this transponder Jamming A receiver monitors the ambient level during normal operation If the ambient level rises above the jamming setting and jamming trouble it is reported to the Central Console The receiver s jamming level can be adjusted by selecting the appropriate setting shown in hexadecimal levels and clicking the Jamming button Jam map Clicking the Jam map button causes the system to interrogate the jamming setti
18. 5 ee FF BF KF KF KE AAAA AAA AA AN NNN NNN NANANG e o Oo ON MO ON NO ON EO SES NO OE EO See ee OE EO OE EO OE EO OE EO ee ON ON MO EO ON OE N EO OE ON EO EO OE OE EO EO OE ON HO HO ON ON HO EO ON ON EO EO OE OE EE D MO ON ON ON ON HO EO HO EO OE ON OE OE ae HO EO OE OM ON ON HO EO EO EO OE OE OE OE EE EE Te u ON CON ON ON ON ON ON ON EO HI EI EI NI EO NO N ON ON OE OE ON COE ON OE EO BO EO EO EI EI EE q ON ON ON CON ON ON CON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ONE HO EO O EI EI EO EO EO EE EI EIE EE w Oo MI KOEKE OE KOEKE KOEKE OE 8 8 He KOEK EE EOEOE KOEK EE OE Ty cy ON ON CON ON CON CON ON ON CON CON CON CON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OE Om ON ON ON Om ON NE Om OE Om OE O O EO EE OE DDOD DOUDOU DOD DODD ODODO DOD EOEE DODD DOn OE Om am wo 5 DOT Oo TM OD HAN EO Oe uw E 2 SESLESESEZSEELLELEELLSSISSS RSIS Nel O o ON HO ON EO ON EO ON EO OE HO OE EO OE EO OE EO OE EO OEEO ON EO OE EO OE EO OE EO OE EO OE o oO nOA ee Bk MO ON OE EO EO OE ON EO EO OE OE EO EO OE ONE EO OE OE EO EO OE OE EO EO OE OE EO EI O OOM ON ON ON WO EI MO EI ON ON ON CE HI O WO EI OE OE OE OE HI EO HI EO OE ON OE OE EE O EE vi ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON EO HE EE EE EE OE ON OE OE OE OE OE OEE EO EE EE OE 7 CECE ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OWN N oO oe eee ee EE O OOE ON CON OE CON CON ON ON CON OE COE COE ON ON OE ON ON ON ON ON Om ON Om ON ON ON NE Om OE Om Os w CE ON ON CE ON ON CE ON ON ON ON CE CECE ON ON ON CE ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON CeCe Om OE
19. EA120 Electronics for indoor and outdoor alert unit SE485 Interface between transponder and Central Console SE2 transmitters Man down lanyard supervisory and duress transmitter SE3401 Point tracking transmitter SE88 Personal watch Pendant transmitter Enclosures and Housings AE3 Large enclosure 51 5 cm x 37 5 cm 20 25 in x 14 75 in AE1 Small enclosure 36 8 cm x 31 8 cm 14 5 in x 12 5 in AE100 Indoor receiver enclosure AE101 Outdoor receiver enclosure Software SE2005 System software for up to 500 users SE2010 System software for up to 1 000 users SE2050 System software for up to 5 000 users 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort System components specifications en 11 System components specifications Central Console Description The Central Console consists of one or two computers and up to 8 additional workstations running the Security Escort software within the Microsoft Windows environment One computer serves as the master controller for the entire Security Escort system and the second slave computer serves as a back up The slave computer can be used for administrative functions such as adding subscribers or performing routine system tests without interfering with the operation of the main computer The workstations can perform all normal Security Escort functions with the exception of communicat
20. Maximum number of bytes that were processed by the system but not yet transmitted on this socket If displayed in yellow more than 50 of the queue was in use 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort 8 5 3 8 5 4 8 6 System menus and dialogs en 215 Reset Status Clicking this button resets all values shown in this dialog Refresh Data Clicking this button refreshes all values shown in this dialog The values are not automatically updated when the dialog is left open Computer s Winsock Data Dialog This dialog shows information about the Windows Winsock support This is only used for diagnostic purposes Figure 8 30 Computer s Winsock Data Dialog Computer s Name and Address Dialog This dialog shows the computer s network name and current IP address Figure 8 31 Computer s Name and IP Address Dialog About menu Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 216 en System menus and dialogs Security Escort Figure 8 32 About Menu Demo manual alarm subscriber 1 Demo lanyard alarm subscriber 2 Demo man down alarm subscriber 3 Demo man down restoral subscriber 3 Demo test subscriber 1 Demo test subscriber 2 File Utilities Logout Setup Printer Network About Demo manual alarm subscriber1 Demo lanyard alarm subscriber 2 Demo man down alarm subscriber 3 Demo man dow
21. Required Yes No Start Character OX OD in Hex Password Modem Mode None X Modem Escape Sequence Pass Show IP Address After Through Yes No RING Yes No Endpoint Configuration Local Port 10001 E Auto increment for active connect Remote Port 0 Remote Host 0 0 0 0 Common Options Telnet Com Port Cntri Disable Connect Response None X A Use z Terminal Name Hostiist Yes No LED Blink Disconnect Mode On Mdm_Ctri_in Drop Yes No Hard Disconnect ves No Check EOT Ctr D Yes No Inactivity Timeout 0 3 10 mins secs Click the OK button to apply the settings The connecting cable is a modified male DB9 to male DB25 serial cable Only 3 wires are compulsory for the modification of DB9 to DB25 cable as illustrated in the table below RS232 Pin Assignment DB9 Pin Male DB25 Pin Male Pin Pin 2 2 3 3 5 7 Table 4 3 Wiring Required pins 9 Connect the male DB9 connector to the transponder and the male DB25 connector to the Lantronix device Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 54 en System wiring Security Escort 4 8 SE485 interface 4 8 1 Introduction The SE485 is designed as an interface between the RS 485 signal bus of the Security Escort transponder and the serial bus RS 232 of the Security Escort Central Console 4 8 2 Specifications Dimensions 135 mm 5 375 in x 85 mm 3 031 in x 30
22. System Defaults dialog 123 System Labels dialog 124 System name 207 System phone 207 System power up 91 System preferences setting 113 System preferences dialog 113 System redundancy 172 automatic 173 manual 173 System Serial 71 System serial port 187 System status dialog 204 Security Escort Tamper 193 transponder 192 Tamper load 195 Test 86 115 Test differential 195 Test min level 195 Test on this MUX point SUCCESSFUL 200 Test receiver 195 Test Time 219 Test transmitter type 195 Tests including point Info 188 Tests single line 188 This schedule defines the check in times 141 Tick Passes Hour 219 Tick Time 218 Titles for subscribers 124 tone dialing 73 Total Disk Space 218 Total Outgoing Messages 203 214 Total Remote Access Connections 203 Total transmissions 201 Total Wrong Access Code Attempts 203 Transmit 199 Transmit Buffer Max 203 214 Transmit delay 195 Transmit point 195 Transmitter exchanging 175 location 174 Transmitter Change 175 Transmitter ID 130 Transmitter low battery 188 Transmitter supervision duration 130 Transmitter Type 129 Transmitting Point 201 Transponder 195 201 database 79 Database creating new entry 82 estimating number of 26 removing from database 81 system power up 92 93 108 troubleshooting 100 101 103 104 Transponder area 139 Transponder comm port setup dialog 70 Transponder communication 188 Transponder data c
23. This field is blank if IP Connected is O RS232 This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters 1 65535 Comm Port Index This field used only if IP Connected is O TCP IP O A T B 9d Gr 3 D a E 5 F 6 G 7 H 8 1 9 J 10 K sd EP Ignore Communications Failure This field is O if this is not selected This field is 1 if this is selected This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Isolate For Location This field is O if this is not selected This field is 1 if this is selected This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Trouble Text This field may be up to 40 characters This field may contain any printable ASCII character except the Tamper Text This field may be up to 40 characters This field may contain any printable ASCII character except the Trouble Response This field may be up to 135 characters This field may contain any printable ASCII character except the Point Number 0 Point Type This field must be O the point number This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters O receiver 1 Alert unit 2 Virtual 7 None This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Algorithm Number O Default 1 Classic 2 Linear 3 Low 4 Medium 5 Strong This field shoul
24. employees of the Security department who may be responsible for maintaining the Subscriber and Operator Databases 7 Find Operator s Database Record Authority Level Install Master Operator ID Ja Insert New Edit Data Address Delet City State ek Zip Phone Created 04 1 8 Thu Apr 01 1993 ifi 01 32 Fri Sep 26 1997 Modified ri Sep E Modify Oper 4 Record size 67 bytes version 1 Locate Key Notes Print Cancel Beginning Previous Next End of File Figure 7 27 Find Operator s Database Record The information in an Operator Database record includes the individual s password full name a unique operator identification number an authority level local address and phone number and notes All fields except the Password field are displayed Even when a specific operator s file is edited via the Edit Data button the password is represented by a number of asterisks for security reasons Edit Operator Database record When adding a new operator or editing the data for an existing operator the Edit Operator Record dialog appears Certain information fields must be completed to produce a valid record The password the authority level and the name must be entered All the other information in the operator s file is optional including the local address local phone number and notes Notice There are two boxes for passwords in the Edit Operator Record dialog Passwor
25. from multiplex device 193 No Restriction 188 Not always top window 116 Not testing report 183 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort O Off 198 Off disarmed 144 On 198 On armed 144 On outside tests flash strobe for X seconds 122 Only From Transponder Selected 188 Open loop alarm 138 Open loop disable 138 Open loop trouble 138 Operator activity log 188 Operator Database 166 Operator database changes 188 Optional parameter 194 Optional text 137 Other Time 219 Outdoor receiver installation 28 Outgoing Retried Messages 203 214 Output device error 193 Output includes subscriber ID 120 Output includes transmitter ID 120 Output verification 185 Overload Count 205 Overload Level 205 Index en 231 P Page to individuals 208 Pager send message 207 Pager communications 115 Pager confirmation not required 137 Pager Group 91 207 208 Pager groups 137 Pager ID 137 206 Pager password 136 Pager setup 205 Pager text Manual 208 Pages per call 206 paging service 206 Password 74 116 166 206 Password verify 74 Paste 89 Personal Ttransmitter automatic capture of ID 117 Pervious 144 Phone 130 Phone number 136 206 Point 117 201 Point troubles 189 Point Type 85 86 87 Points reporting alarm 188 Polygon to define area 89 Pop up trouble and pager delay 194 Popup trouble filter dialog 190 Port N
26. g Ty D MO NO EO HO EI HI EO EO EO EO EO HIE EO EE HI EIE EO EO EO EI EI EI EO EO EE EO EE 2 D AQSaSaISSGRRSBSPePPCP SSS PIP SseSZssss Bs gt E Te oe ome oe o o o o e e e e e e o e e e o o o o o e e TERRE RR a v 2 OO ON MO ON EO ON EO ON EO OE EO OE EO ON EO OE EO OE EO OE Oaoa EO OE EO ONE OE EI EA N OOE CON WO NI ON CON HI EO ON CON HI EI ON ON HO EI ON ON EIE ON OE HI EI ON ON EO EO OE OE EE DO ON ON ON HO EO HO EO OE ON OE OE OE EE OE OE OE OE EE EO EO OE OE OE OE EE EE e wn ee ON ON ON ON ON ON ON HO HE EO EO EO EO EO EO OE ON ON OE ON OE ON OE Re EO EE EE EE o lt ON ON ON CON ON ON CON CON CON ON ON ON ON OE ON ONE HO EI EI EI EI EO EO EO EI EI EI EO EO EO EE R NE HO HO HO HO EO HI EO EO EO EO EO EO EO EO EE HE EO EO EO EO EO EO EO EO EO HOE HOE P OD Om Ha Ha ce Ha CR HA AA HA CE CE CE CH HAHA EA CON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OE Om Os 5 SRESSSISSSSSSBerserse er s 2RSNKsVRs A c recreere ee renren EEER ERE Ee eere rrre 2 eo ON HO ON EO ON HO ON EO OE EO ON EI ON EO OE EI OE BO OEEO OE EO OE EO OE EO OE EO OE EO OE sa n 9 M OOE ON NO NO ON ON HO EO OE ON EI EI ON OE HO EO OE ONE EO ON OE EO EI OE OE EO EO OE OE EE a ti a th B o OOM CON ON CON HO NO NO WO ON ON ON ON HO EO HO WE ON ONCE ON N EO HO EO ON ON OE OE EE EE 2 2 i OE ON ON ON ON ON ON ON EO HI EI EI MI EO HO EO OE ON OE OE ON OE OE OE EI EI EO EO EO EI EE Ke 9 Be D OO ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON CON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OE ON ON ON
27. gt Ls Proaram Files x86 Figure 5 6 Choose Folder Dialog Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 64 en Installation options Security Escort Click the Next gt button on the Choose Destination Folder dialog The Setup Type dialog appears Setup Type Select the setup type to install Click the type of setup you prefer then click Next Typical Program will be installed with the most common options Recommended for most users Compact Program will be installed with minimum required options Custom You may select the options you want to install Recommended for advanced users InstallShield Figure 5 7 Setup Type Dialog Select the type of installation you desire Typical For new installations this is the option you should choose It guarantees that all required components are installed and includes the installer for the software key Use this selection for demo installations Do not use this selection on existing installations it replaces the databases and maps with the demo databases and maps Compact Only installs the application files This selection can be used to update an existing installation It does not write over the databases and map files This selection cannot be used for new installations because it does not contain all required components the installer for the software key databases and maps Custom This selection contains all
28. l Remote key tamper Jamming Bus faults Bad checksum Transponder troubles MUX point troubles l Communications failure Output device error l Transponder startup a COMM port overload Network comm failure Transmitter supervision monitor Known transmitters E i M All troubles to history Unknown transmitters D Popup trouble and pager delay Monitored periods 8 30 seconds Save Cancel Figure 8 15 Popup Trouble Filter Dialog Transponder troubles group Communications failure To continually assure that communications between the Central Console and each transponder are functioning properly each transponder is required to send a message to the Central Console periodically If there is no response from the transponder the Central Console displays a communications failure warning and records the condition in the audit file If a transponder determines it lost communications with the Central Console it assumes control of the outputs of the devices connected to it and transmits I M OK messages until it is acknowledged by the Central Console Notice If during this loss of communications an alarm transmission is received by one or more of the receivers attached to the transponder the transponder activates any alert units attached to it as well as the horns and red LED s on any of its receivers which detected the alarm transmission Since the transponder does not have access to th
29. nill Tr Inside of AE161 Enclosure 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort System wiring en 47 4 5 4 Wiring Wire the alert unit using the figure below Microprocessor Battery Connector i C 1 pg Use cable E e Ee OF 5555 GES Pi T P Pa BT aU AR Tamper Swich wired io Mami P Teminat died TANET Switches S an ad Law her Strole rte ound ga tehecc Spars 1 Tur Transtar er AT SOU HIE za Tarpe Saile Pur Transponder To Next Device 4 5 5 Set the address Every module on each multiplex bus of the transponder must have its own address Set the address on the alert unit using the address switch Use only address numbers 0 through 7 Do NOT use address numbers 8 and 9 4 6 Moxa interface 4 6 1 Introduction The Moxa interface is used between the RS 232 signal bus of the Security Escort transponder and the Ethernet connection of the Local Area Network LAN in order to communicate with the Security Escort Central Console Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 48 en System wiring 4 6 2 4 6 3 Specifications Recommended Model Dimensions Power Recommended Cable NPort 5150 Security Escort 52 mm 2 05 in x 80 mm 3 15 in x 22 mm 0 89 in Use the included 12 48 V DC on barrel connector Standard male DB9 to female DB9 serial cable not includ
30. 0 DOC 200 en System menus and dialogs Security Escort 8 3 7 r Receiver Setup and Test Transponder TP A10 3 BUS 0 point 2 2 Abort setup for this MUX point Ambient 0 Horn Siren MF Auto Advance V Red LED Strobe RF micro revision M Green Led Switching Left S ES 80 r c Right Cco 60 Default CAD C au Meeting room Cancel The history display shows maps from the selected transponder Figure 8 19 Abort Button to Remove a Device from the Setup Mode The Central Console also confirms the successful setup with an audible and text message The Abort setup for this MUX point button disappears and is replaced by Test on this MUX point SUCCESSFUL button Click this button to conclude the test on this point Receiver test dialog Use this dialog to set up and monitor four receivers and listen to one receiver transmitting with its buddy check transmitter Normally the function is for engineering evaluation of new transmitter and receiver designs but it can be used to test receiver boards and locations ina working system 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort System menus and dialogs en 201 Fr Setup Receiver Test Configuration and Run Test Transponder l Run test Spacin 0 seconds Transmitting Point fo j 3 0 Total transmissions 0 Stop test and reset counters Missed all receivers 0 Close dialog does n
31. 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 08 00 um OO EO BL N This schedule defines the check in times F z Holiday dates n Edit Schedule Times Remove gt gt View Alarm Groups Date E nore Ho Me for this schedule Cancel Figure 7 16 Schedule Screen 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort 7 11 1 Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 141 For each day of the week the arm time time the schedule becomes active and disarm time time the schedule becomes inactive are displayed To edit the arm and disarm times click the Edit Schedule Times button Double clicking the number of the schedule allows you to name the schedules This schedule defines the One of the ten schedules can be used to define the check in check in times times for those subscribers that must check in Click on the schedule for the check in schedule highlighting it Then check this checkbox to set the selected schedule as the chec
32. 1 4 3 2 4 3 3 4 3 4 EA500 transponder General The EA500 transponder is the Security Escort module that provides communications between the Central Console and the many receivers and alert units throughout the protected area In addition to its communications functions it also supplies power to the receivers Each transponder also includes drivers for a single strobe and siren Specifications Enclosure AE3 15 in W 20 75 in H 4 25 in D Hardware Kit H500 Temperature Range 40 to 149 F 40 to 65 C Power 18 0 VAC 50 VA maximum plug in Transformer for 110 V 60 Hz Supplies battery backed 12 0 VDC power to Receivers Power Output 9V DC used for SE485 or for Proxim radio power Driver Outputs Strobe 500 mA solid state sink terminal switches to ground in an alarm condition Siren 500 mA solid state sink terminal switches to ground in an alarm condition Battery Backup 12 VDC Lead Acid Battery Multiplex Buses 8 multiplex drivers each capable of driving 8 Receivers or Alert Units for a combined total of 64 Receivers and Alert Units per transponder Comm Interface Selectable SE485 or RS 232 Keyswitch Input 47k EOL resistor supervised loop Compatibility ROM version 4 00 or greater version shipped with this unit is compatible with 304 equipment e g EA102A 304 Version 4 00 or greater is NOT compatible with non 304 equipment ROM versions earlier than 4 00 are compatible with non
33. 13 5 V DC on power replace receiver Check rotary switches on all receivers on that bus to be sure there are no duplicate ID numbers Moisture or water on receiver Replace receiver with new one until the old receiver dries out Seal any point where moisture is entering the receiver housing Length of cable to receiver Receiver is mounted over 900 m 3000 ft from transponder Reconfigure the bus run to make sure receiver is within 900 m 3000 ft of the transponder Bad splice to receiver Check all splices to make sure cables are tight and not loose causing high resistance open Defective receiver If power is present on BUS and PWR between 7 5 VDC and 10 5 VDC on bus and 10 5 VDC and 13 5 VDC on power replace receiver 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Symptoms Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 107 Probable Cause Possible Solutions Receiver jamming Receiver LEDs not working Electrical equipment in area causing jamming on receiver LEDs not positioned behind viewing lens Go to the software dialog Setup receiver configuration Increase jamming threshold by one degree at a time until jamming stops and receiver returns to normal If jamming persists after increasing level relocate receiver or attempt to identify and minimize the jamming source Rem
34. 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort 7 15 4 7 15 5 Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 171 son MEE as Edit Alarm Report Information Select problem type Name ane Smith Unknown Address Room 95 __ City PO State C Zip Subscriber ID 10 62 0046 C Medical problem Phone 2001 Faculty False alarm Cc Person threatened Accident person Accident auto Enter name of OFFICER responding to the alarm Alarm demonstration Enter description of PROBLEM Describe ACTION taken e Other problem Figure 7 33 Edit Alarm Report Information Delete This button deletes the alarm report from the database If the report is deleted the data can not be recovered Locate Key This button works similarly to the Locate Key button in the Operator and Subscriber Database Entering the Subscriber Name Transmitter ID Subscriber ID Subscriber Class problem type or a specific time and date can locate a specific report Locate Alarm Database Record Subscriber Name Transmitter ID oo SubseriberID Subscriber Class f 0 Hours EE Minutes Month Day Year Other problem one Select problem type Unknown Person threatened Accident person Accident auto Medical problem False alarm Alarm demonstration 2 N Figure 7 34 Locate Alarm Database
35. 213 Cartridge disk drive 180 Central Console Function of 11 minimum system requirements 11 software overview 11 versions 11 wiring 48 50 Character limit 206 Check in Schedule 140 Choose Destination Location dialog 62 City 130 Classic algorithm 87 Clear 126 Clear EE 196 Clear screen 185 Close dialog does not stop test 202 COM 70 71 Comm fail to siren out 195 Comm Mode 80 Comm Port Index 80 Comm port overload 193 Comm fail reset 211 Communications failure of 191 Communications failure 188 Communications failure messages disabling 81 Compatible parts 10 Computer Master 73 remote 73 Slave 73 workstation 73 Contact information 123 Control room 117 Control room output to siren 116 Control room output to spare 116 Control room output to strobe 116 Copy 81 89 CR Only 72 CR LF 72 Created 80 CTS Control 70 Current Check in Status dialog 145 Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 228 en Index Cut 89 D Daily test report 183 Daily trouble report 183 Database backup 178 Database backup and restore 188 Database errors 189 Database find level 122 Database restore 180 Databases operator editing 166 reports map 170 reports sorting 171 subscriber editing 125 Databases are not shared 211 Day month format 114 Day of the Week 143 Default Master computer 73 Default Slave computer 73 Delete 171 Delete Point 81 Demo alarms
36. 27 Floor 19 28 Floor 20 29 Floor 21 30 Floor 22 31 Floor 23 32 Floor 24 33 Floor 25 34 Floor 26 35 Floor 27 36 Floor 28 37 Floor 29 38 Floor 30 39 Floor 31 40 Floor 32 41 Floor 33 42 Floor 34 43 Floor 35 44 Floor 36 45 Floor 37 46 Floor 38 47 Floor 39 48 Floor 40 49 Floor 41 50 Floor 42 51 Floor 43 52 Floor 44 53 Floor 45 54 Floor 46 55 Floor 47 56 Floor 48 57 Floor 49 58 Floor 50 59 Floor 51 60 Floor 52 61 Floor 53 62 Floor 54 63 Floor 55 64 Floor 56 65 Floor 57 66 Floor 58 67 Floor 59 68 Floor 60 69 Floor 61 70 Floor 62 71 Floor 63 72 Floor 64 73 Floor 65 74 Floor 66 75 Floor 67 76 Floor 68 77 Floor 69 78 Floor 70 79 Floor 71 80 Floor 72 81 Floor 73 82 Floor 74 83 Floor 75 84 Floor 76 85 Floor 77 86 Floor 78 87 Floor 79 88 Floor 80 89 Floor 81 90 Floor 82 91 Floor 83 92 Floor 84 93 Floor 85 94 Floor 86 95 Floor 87 96 Floor 88 97 Floor 89 98 Floor 90 99 Floor 91 100 Floor 92 101 Floor 93 102 Floor 94 103 Floor 95 104 Floor 96 105 Floor 97 106 Floor 98 107 Floor 99 This field
37. 46 Floor 38 47 Floor 39 48 Floor 40 49 Floor 41 50 Floor 42 51 Floor 43 52 Floor 44 53 Floor 45 54 Floor 46 55 Floor 47 56 Floor 48 57 Floor 49 58 Floor 50 59 Floor 51 60 Floor 52 61 Floor 53 62 Floor 54 63 Floor 55 64 Floor 56 65 Floor 57 66 Floor 58 67 Floor 59 68 Floor 60 69 Floor 61 70 Floor 62 71 Floor 63 72 Floor 64 73 Floor 65 74 Floor 66 75 Floor 67 76 Floor 68 77 Floor 69 78 Floor 70 79 Floor 71 80 Floor 72 81 Floor 73 82 Floor 74 83 Floor 75 84 Floor 76 85 Floor 77 86 Floor 78 87 Floor 79 88 Floor 80 89 Floor 81 90 Floor 82 91 Floor 83 92 Floor 84 93 Floor 85 94 Floor 86 95 Floor 87 96 Floor 88 97 Floor 89 98 Floor 90 99 Floor 91 100 Floor 92 101 Floor 93 102 Floor 94 103 Floor 95 104 Floor 96 105 Floor 97 106 Floor 98 107 Floor 99 This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Alert Unit 1 Al This field contains the Transponder ID of the alert unit If this is not configured this field is O This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual
38. ASCII characters Point Location Text AQ This field may be up to 100 characters This field may contain any printable ASCII character except the Map X Position AR X position of the point on the map Default is 0 This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Map Y Position AS Y position of the point on the map Default is 0 This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Sensitivity Adjust Bitmap Number AT AU 0 99 This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters 0 99 This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 162 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units Security Escort Data fields in required Excel Restrictions order Column Point Number 63 AOS This field must be 63 the point number This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Point Type AOT O receiver 1 Alert unit 2 Virtual 7 None This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Algorithm Number AOU O Default 1 Classic 2 Linear 3 Low 4 Medium 5 Strong This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Floor AOV O Basement5 1 Basement4 2 Basement3 3 Basement2 4 Basementi 5 Tunnel 6 Basement 7 Ground 8 Outside
39. Database The following sections describe the steps to export and import data from and into the Transponder Database The file formats for the tasks are included in detail Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 156 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units Security Escort r F ET N a EN Transponder Data Record size 5864 bytes version 7 Type transponder Created 17 04 Mon May 18 2015 Name TP A10 3 or Modified ID3 RadioiDpf0 Modify Oper A Comm Mode TCP IP IP Address 10 123 43111 000 Port No jas Isolate From All Other Transponders For Location Ignore Communications Failure r MUX Point Data Point Type EG Import Export Point Number jo e None Insert New Bus 0 point 0 l Bus Bus Edit Data Kill Transponder Delete Point Copy Print Beginning Previous Next End of File Cancel Figure 7 25 Find Transponder s Database Record Dialog 7 13 1 File format of TRANSMERGE DAT TRANSMERGE_EXPORT DAT The file of data record entries must be in tab delimited text format For import functionality It must be placed in the Security Escort folder typically C ESCORT and named as TRANSMERGE DAT For export functionality the exported file is named as TRANSMERGE EXPORT DAT Both file formats are the same The data fields must be in the following order delimited by the horiz
40. Floor 91 Floor Level 86 137 Floppy A 180 Force map background erase 114 Free Disk Space 218 G Green Led 198 Guard tour exception report 183 Guard tour level 123 Guard tour minutes 123 Guard tour report 183 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort H Hair Color 130 Hardware Overrun 203 205 Height 130 High speed buddy check 114 Highest 201 History archive file A 187 History archive file B 187 History filter dialog 186 History filter output 74 History screen 187 Hits 201 Horn Siren 198 l ID Receiver 117 Idle Passes Hour 219 Idle processing disable 115 Idle Time 218 Ignore Communications Failure 81 Ignore Holidays for this Schedule 141 142 Image 132 Image File 131 Image file path 213 Importing a Subscriber Database 146 Importing a Transponder Database 155 Importing the Subscriber Database 153 Importing the Transponder Database 164 Incoming Communication Errors 203 214 Incoming Retried Messages 203 214 Incomplete alarm report 172 Indoor receiver installation 28 Information 131 Information field labels 124 Insert New 81 Insert new transponder 83 Installation Complete dialog 65 Installation procedure 60 Installation starts progress 65 Installer alarms silent 121 IP Address 80 Isolate From All Other Transponders For Location 80 J Jam map 199 Jamming 199 Jamming of receiver 193 JPG 13
41. Floor 87 96 Floor 88 97 Floor 89 98 Floor 90 99 Floor 91 100 Floor 92 101 Floor 93 102 Floor 94 103 Floor 95 104 Floor 96 105 Floor 97 106 Floor 98 107 Floor 99 This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Data fields in required order Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 163 Excel Column Restrictions Alert Unit 1 AOW This field contains the Transponder ID of the alert unit If this is not configured this field is O This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Alert Unit 1 Point AOX This field contains the alert unit point number If this is not configured this field is 1 This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Alert Unit 2 AOY This field contains the Transponder ID of the alert unit If this is not configured this field is O This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Alert Unit 2 Point AOZ This field contains the alert unit point number If this is not configured this field is 1 This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Alert Unit 3 Alert Unit 3 Point APA APB This field contains the Transponder ID of the alert unit If this is not configured this field is O This field should co
42. O to 79 Use the Locate button to define the area graphically on the map Selects a system serial port that is programmed in the Remote Setup dialog The purpose is to display the area where the alarm is most likely located on the CCTV monitors near the Central Console The string would activate a macro in the video switcher that selects the appropriate camera and controls any required zoom and tilt actions Up to 40 characters may be entered Control characters may be entered as A for control A This Pager Group field may be programmed with a pager group that is paged if the alarm location is determined to be in this area This pager group will be the first group paged to allow quick response by those individuals charged with responding to an alarm in this area Each area may be assigned a pager group that can be the same or different from other alarm areas The default alarm Pager group defined in the Pager Setup dialog will also be paged after the pager group is assigned to an area If a pager group is not assigned to an area or the alarm location is not within a defined area then only the default pager group will be paged Determines the floor number that this area is defined for The areas on floors above and below this one may be defined differently In order for an area to be selected when an alarm is received the location determined by the Central Console must be located within the defined area and it must be located on the desi
43. ON CE ON ON N ON ON OE ON ON OE CE CE CE CE CE CE CE CE CE OCE CE CE O iay v ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OE CON OE OE ON OE ON OE OE ON OE OE ONCE ONCE 4 D ON ON Om Om CE CE CE ON N OCE ON ON ON CECE OCE ON OE OE CE OE CECE OCE CECE CE CECE ONCE R E v HK NOTMORODROK NOT OHOROREKTARSERERRBSS ay c op c Seer er Ke KF KF KF KE KEAN NN NNN AN OO O F a ings tch sett ip swi D Figure 4 4 Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Security Escort System wiring en 39 4 4 EA102A 304 receiver 4 4 1 Specifications Enclosure Available in indoor and weatherproof outdoor enclosure Temperature Range 40 to 149 F 40 to 65 C Power 12VDC 25 mA typical 55mA with horn sounding RF Input Frequency 304 000 Mhz Signal Strength Measured in 255 steps Antenna Type Diversity antennas Compatibility SE2x 304 Series and SE4x 304 Series Transmitters EA500B Transponder with a ROM version 4 00 or greater Notice The EA102A 304 is compatible only with other 304 equipment e g the SE2x 304 and the SE4x 304 Also do NOT install this unit in conjunction with an EA500B transponder with a ROM version earlier than 4 00 4 4 2 Mounting Choose a mounting location based upon the previous site survey The receiver should be mounted as close as possible to the location found with the test receiver The following is a guideline for receiver mounting and spacing Indoor receiver installatio
44. Record As in the Operator and Subscriber Database the subscriber records are temporarily ordered according to the field entered in the Locate Key dialog Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 172 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units Security Escort 7 15 6 7 15 7 7 16 Key Select This button also works similarly to its counterparts in the Operator and Subscriber Database Using it the reports can be ordered by Subscriber Name Transmitter ID Subscriber ID Alarm Time Problem Type or Subscriber Type F Select Database Key Alarm Time Transmitter ID Subscriber ID Subscriber Name Problem Type Subscriber Type Select Figure 7 35 Select Database Key Incomplete When this button is clicked the most recent incident report file that has not been completed will be displayed The reports are not reordered when this command is used System redundancy The Security Escort system redundancy is operational as long as master and slave controllers are configured in a network setup By default master computer is the one controlling the devices If the master computer is unavailable for some reasons slave computer could take over the operation automatically or manually Once the master computer is back online slave computer will hand over the control to the master computer If both the master and slave computers are not available the system is n
45. This is the network menu used to set up and monitor the TCP IP network and the computer s file paths Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 210 en System menus and dialogs Security Escort File Utilities Logout Setup Printer About System directories and network address Network socket status Get this computer s Winsock Data i Get this computer s name and address Figure 8 27 Network Menu 8 5 1 System Directories and Network Address Dialog Use this dialog to set up the network IP addresses ports and related options File paths can also be configured Edit System Directories and Network 4 Databases are not shared l Disable auto reconnect Show connection pop ups Auto synchronize time Show all error pop ups l Comm fail reset Master s Network Address Slave s Network Address 10 1 23 43 1 fi 0 123 43 73 Master s Network Listen Port Slave s Network Listen Port a561 a561 Remote Control Listening Port a562 Master Database path De Slave Database path MV Autobackup to the slave database WA Local Escort path CAESCORT Backup restore to disk cartridge path Subscriber image file path Extension JPG Scaling 100 CAESCORTMMAGE SY ses Figure 8 28 System Directories and Network Address Dialog 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Databases are not shared Show connection pop ups
46. above All from Transponder Selected All events are reported from the transponder selected above The selected events are reported from all other transponders in the system Outputs the information about an alarm including location but not the transponder and receiver levels This is the data typically sent to a printer Outputs the transponder and receiver levels for an alarm Typically this is the data too detailed to send to a printer and is used for diagnostics not normal system operation Outputs the simple information about a test Typically this is the data normally sent to a printer Outputs the transponder and receiver levels for a test This is the data usually too detailed to send to a printer and is used for diagnostics not normal system operation If this option is selected Test single line above would not be selected for the same output device Outputs low battery reports received from transmitters Outputs all other operator activity audit trail not covered by specific event selections Outputs all changes made to system preference selections Records all database backup and restore activity Records all changes to the operator database Records all changes to the subscriber database Records all changes to the transponder database This is a future option that has no function at this time leave unchecked Records all changes to the Alarm Report Database Records all communication failures and restor
47. alarm 139 Workstation computer 73 Write EXCEL import file 127 Z Zip 130 Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd 11 Bishan Street 21 573943 Singapore Singapore www boschsecurity com Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd 2015 Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Robert Bosch Ring 5 85630 Grasbrunn Germany
48. be within the specified ID capture receiver set in the System Preferences dialog before the system will recognize the test 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort 7 8 Locate test level Guard tour level Guard tour minutes Watchdog minutes Popup trouble box contact information Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 123 This is the minimum receive level 1 255 that must be heard before the system will accept a test generated by a transmitter other than a guard to be printed with a location It determines the distance the transmitter must be within from a receiver before the system will recognize the test and print the location If the transmitter is too far away from the receiver that receiver s green light will not be displayed so the guard knows that they must move closer to the receiver for the test to register This is the minimum receive level 1 255 that must be heard before the system will accept a test generated by the guard s transmitter to be entered as a location in the guard tour report It determines the distance the guard s transmitter must be within from a receiver before the system will recognize the test and create the guard tour entry If the guard is too far away from the receiver that receiver s green light will not be displayed so the guard knows that they must move closer to the receiver for the test to
49. connects the master and slave computers of the Security Escort System If this system has only a single computer this setting should be set to none This port typically connects to the modem for remote access and pager dial out If set in the Remote Setup dialog use this port without a modem for direct connection to a computer that is always on line This is a general purpose serial port Its function is set up in the Remote Setup dialog The actual physical communication port over which these communications are carried Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 72 en Central Console computer setup and programming Security Escort 6 3 Baud The speed at which characters are transmitted on this serial port This setting must match the baud rate of the device connected at the other end of this serial connection This setting should always be at the highest speed that both connected devices have in common Modem connections are typically much more efficient if the baud rate is set significantly faster than the modems rated speed for a 28 8 modem set the baud rate to 57600 or 115200 The default setting is 9600 baud CR LF Appends carriage return and line feed characters at the end of each string transmitted default Only functions with the system serial ports ignored on the network and modem ports CR Only Appends a carriage return character at the end of each string transmitted Only funct
50. en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units Data fields in required order Excel Column Security Escort Restrictions Subscriber Name A This field may be up to 30 characters This field may contain any printable ASCII character except the Subscriber ID This field may be up to 12 characters This field may contain only ALPHA numeric and the dash ASCII characters Here Phone Number This field may be up to 16 characters This field may contain only numeric comma and the dash ASCII characters Here Address 1 This field may be up to 30 characters This field may contain any printable ASCII character except the Here Address 2 This field may be up to 30 characters This field may contain any printable ASCII character except the Here City This field may be up to 20 characters This field may contain any printable ASCII character except the Here State This field may be up to 3 characters This field may contain only ALPHA ASCII characters Here Zip This field may be up to 10 characters This field may contain only ALPHA numeric and the dash ASCII characters Away Phone Number This field may be up to 16 characters This field may contain only numeric comma and the dash ASCII characters Away Address 1 This field may be u
51. extreme caution Hold down the lt Shift gt lt Ctr gt keys when opening the dialog to enable the Clear entire file option When the Restore button is clicked the database selected will be restored from the destination selected on the right Use with extreme caution _ All updates not in backup will be lost This message box is a reminder that if changes to the system databases have been made since the backup was made the changes will be lost Therefore those changes must be redone to the restored database EE mr Restore Successful d Old file was saved in backup 2 path with OLD extension This message box indicates the restore has been completed The previous database file has been renamed with an OLD extension and saved in the Escort sub directory Only the most recent database of each type is retained Print Export System Reports This dialog allows the system reports to be printed on demand scheduled for printing each night at midnight or weekly on Sunday at midnight To print a report select the left checkbox for each desired report and click the Print button Select the Midnight report or the Sunday only checkboxes to automatically schedule the selected report at those times 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort System menus and dialogs en 183 Select Which Reports Are To Be Printed P EE EE System
52. for each day of the week You must individually select each day of the week and set the desired times View Alarm Groups dialog This dialog shows the alarm groups that are assigned to the selected schedule and their current arming state The ON and OFF states indicate that the alarm group is under manual control AUTO is under control of the selected schedule The alarm group will be armed if the schedule is active r View Alarm Groups Alarm groups assigned to the selected schedule Group GroupName Group State Figure 7 19 View Alarm Groups Dialog Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 144 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units Security Escort 7 11 4 Alarm Groups dialog This dialog allows setup and arm disarm control of the 99 alarm groups Any number of point type transmitters can be assigned to an alarm group in the Subscriber Database s Advanced dialog However each transmitter can only be assigned to one alarm group An alarm group can be manually armed and disarmed or assigned to a schedule to automatically arm and disarm the alarm group 4 q k Edit alarm group data e d Alarm group name ji Alarm group i Cancel Arming state of this alarm group C Off disarmed On armed C Automatic by schedule None First lt lt Previous Next gt gt Last Figure 7 20 Alarm Groups Dialo
53. from the import merge file you will need to format the data and columns according to a specific format To simplify the preparation it is recommended that you perform the export function first so that you can use the exported file as your template for your data import merge You will need to rename the file from TABMERGE_EXPORT DAT to TABMERGE DAT accordingly Only users or operators who are assigned the minimum security level of View Subscribers are able to view the Subscriber Database Go to menu File gt Subscriber Database dialog and click the Export button Notice Important The export operation does not change the existing records in Subscriber Database However be mindful that every time you perform the export function clicking the Export button the operation will overwrite the TABMERGE EXPORT DAT file Be patient as it may take a while and watch for the disk activity to stop If the export is successful a confirmation dialog appears You will find the TABMERGE_EXPORT DAT file in the Security Escort folder typically C ESCORT 7 12 3 Importing the Subscriber Database This section describes the information required to import data into the Subscriber Database Notice There is no way to undo the operations Therefore it is recommended to perform a database backup prior to starting the task Upon completion of the task verify the updated data before the new database is place
54. govern the behavior of the Security Escort System Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 114 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units Edit System Preferences Run buddy check Show test levels m m m F m F d m N F Force map background erase Supervise unauthorized High speed buddy check Show maintenance levels Enable algorithm tweaks Pager communications Monitor communications Monitor supervisions Display maintenance alarm Sound maintenance alarm Disable idle processing Security Escort No Buddy Check Delay No password to exit No password on reentry No password timeout Bring to front on alarm Bring to front on trouble Control room output to siren Control room output to strobe Control room output to spare Control room output to output 1 Control room output to output 2 Not always top window Excel test history files LPS a m LD LESS RI RT KI RIT ID Receiver Point Control room Point Map scale fi 00 Alarm spot size 38 Linear depth 2 Low depth 2 Medium depth 2 Strong depth 2 Save Figure 7 5 System Preferences Dialog Force map background erase Run buddy check Day month format Supervise unauthorizedt High speed buddy check Use this checkbox to erase the map screen It should only be checked if there are problems with icons not being cleared properly from the screen Otherwise
55. holster must be in its normal mounting attitude and be worn on the belt of the individual originating the test transmissions Handheld transmitters must be held in the hand about waist high never held above the head Using a standard subscriber transmitter 1 This method requires two people with radio contact between them One person operates the computer running the Security Escort software and the other takes the subscriber transmitter to the area to be tested 2 Press the alarm on the transmitter and remain at the spot where you transmitted 3 The computer operator acknowledges the alarm and accurately describes the computed location over the radio The individual with the transmitter should confirm the reported location or describe over the radio the actual location Either individual must record all discrepancies including the actual and computed locations 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 111 We recommend using a map or floor plan and drawing an arrow from the actual alarm location to the reported location It is also helpful if all successful alarm locations are marked with a P passed then the alarm can be reset from the computer screen For areas where there are alarm location problems try facing in different directions in the same spot Also generate additional alarms from different spots to fully
56. in normal system This value controls the time that all the comm ports in the system will be automatically reset after configured duration This setting is used only if any communication failure is observed and should not be used unnecessarily This option turns on all outputs of the transponders and alert units for the duration configured 1 255 seconds when alarm is generated If someone acknowledges an alarm during this duration all these outputs will be turned off Otherwise after this duration has lapsed all these outputs will be turned off automatically If this value is set to 0 the system will trigger the outputs during alarms in the default normal behavior A check in this checkbox causes a prompt to appear on the Central Console screen every 5 minutes for 30 minutes prior to the end of each shift if there are incident reports that have not yet been completed It is intended for responding officers to complete alarm reports before the end of their shift The entries in these fields are the times 24 hour clock at which the Central Console will prompt the operator that there is one or more incident reports that have not yet been completed Prompts will be given only if the End of Shift Reminder option is selected This is the minimum receive level 1 255 that must be heard before the system will automatically enter the transmitter in the Subscriber Locate dialog It determines the distance the subscriber s transmitter must
57. interface 4 Go to Serial Settings gt Port 1 Remove any entry in the Port alias field it must be empty Set the Baud Rate field as 9600 the Data Bits field as 8 the Stop Bits field as 1 the Parity field as None the Flow Control field as None the FIFO field as Enable and the Interface field as RS 232 NPort Web Console Windows Internet Explorer Ge J v l ve 1012343205 v Blelx Hat Pl File Edit View Favorites Tools Help oy Favorites IS Pwe FI gt NPort web Console X f Lantronix Device Server A 0 n 7 Page Safety Tool gt Serial Settings Port 1 Port alias i Serial Parameters Baud rate s0 x Data bits ss stop bits iw Parity None m Flow control None J FIFO Enable O Disable interface RS 232 x A ORES f r Rio 5 Click the Submit button to make the changes and restart the Moxa device 6 Go to Operating Settings gt Port 1 It is recommended to enter 1 in the TCP alive check time field 8000 in the Inactivity time field and 2 in the Force transmit field Please refer to the Moxa User Manual for further details Enter the port number of the transponder in the Local TCP Port field This port number must be the same number as Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 50 en Syst
58. level at which the test transmission was heard The right box displays the average number of packets heard from a single test transmission Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 202 en System menus and dialogs Security Escort 8 3 8 Lowest The left box displays the lowest receive level at which the test transmission was heard The right box displays the least number of packets heard from a single test transmission Run test The test only runs when this checkbox is checked To stop the test and retain the test values uncheck this checkbox Spacing This slows the test by forcing this number of seconds between test transmissions Normally this setting is left at the default of O Stop test and reset counters Clicking this button stops the test and resets all values Close dialog does not stop test Clicking this button closes this dialog but does not stop the test from running Reopening the dialog displays the current progress of the test The test should not be left running unless there is a specific need as it generates both RF and system traffic Network status dialog This dialog shows the status of communications on the network modem and system serial ports sesse ese OE N EET TT Serial Network Modem Sys Serial1 Sys Serial 2 Successful Incoming Messages Incoming Communications Errors Incoming Retried Messages Total Outgoing Messages Outgoing Retried Messages Receive
59. may slow the paging report to people that must respond A pager group may contain members accessed by the local paging system and members that require dial up access Dial up access typically takes much longer and it may slow pages to the local paging system Subscriber Database Advanced Features The Subscriber Database contains the information on the transmitters that are assigned in the system See the Security Escort Operation Manual for the basic operations of the Subscriber Database dialog See the section on Exporting importing and merging the Subscriber Database page 146 for information on the data merge import and export functions of the Subscriber Database The following section explains the advanced features of the Subscriber Database dialog when you are inserting a new or editing an existing subscriber Subscriber s Advanced Features dialog Clicking the Advanced button in the Edit Subscriber Database dialog opens the Edit Subscriber s Advanced Features dialog window Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 136 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units Security Escort Edit Subscriber s Advanced Features e mar Fixed location transmitter Phone number Floor level Floor 1 Pager password ma Map X Position 624 Locate Pager ID Map Y Position 234 Pager Groups p o mm Map number jo Pager Confirmation Not Requried Enable reed switch Optional text Stor
60. mm 1 187 in Power Use the included 120 V AC adaptor to 9 V DC 300 mA or power from the transponder Recommended 2 twisted pair 4 conductor 22 AWG 0 8 mm Cable Compatibility EA500B transponder EA501B transponder 4 8 3 Installation and operation notes Remove the cover by removing the cover screws shown below Cever Screws ss Connect the wiring as shown below 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort System wiring en 55 Wiring Connectors to Transponder Ground is Not Needed Twisted Pair Wire Power Supply 31578 O Center Positive p Connector for we Multiple SE485s Optional 9 VDC Input from Transponder Power LED Escort Transponder Escort Transponder To Next Transponder To Central Station RS 232 Port Use 25 pin male to 9 pin female or 25 pin male to 25 pin female straight computer serial cable no longer than 15 m 50 ft do not use Null Modem Cable After wiring the system replace the cover and power up the unit Operation notes Each transponder must have its own address For the Security Escort system to maintain operation the SE485 must be powered at all times Use the 9 V adaptor provided plugged into an uninterrupted power supply UPS The SE485 may also be powered from the transponder s 9 V output connected to the 9 V DC input wirin
61. objects such as HVAC ducts is on an inside wall if possible is 1 5 to 1 8 m 5 to 6 ft from the floor is not at a barrier where it is important to resolve which side an alarm location is on and will not be damaged by tampering or opening doors Outdoor receiver installation Receiver spacing Receivers should be mounted every 91 5 m 300 ft It is very important to maintain as consistent spacing as possible as this will ensure optimum signal locating The more receivers that can detect a transmitted signal the more accurate the locating will be Each receiver should have a clear line of sight of the intended protection area Mounting height Receivers should be mounted 3 m 10 ft above grade Maintain a mounting height that is as consistent as possible to ensure optimum signal locating Overhangs eaves Receiver locations should be below building overhangs and eaves Most transmissions will occur a few feet 1 m above grade mounting above overhangs and eaves could result in inaccurate signal locating Be especially careful around metal roofs as these can block the signal Select a mounting location that provides a clear line of sight of the protected area is away from metallic objects such as chain link fences and electrical transformers If coverage is required near such items testing should be performed near these items to determine the potential need for additional receivers is 3m 10 ft above grade
62. on the Edit Data button and clicking the checkbox next to Disabled in the upper left corner of the dialog If the box has a check mark the subscriber s transmitter is ignored by the system if it does not the transmitter is recognized and alarms are displayed If checked a system that normally sounds alarms is silent for all alarms generated by this transmitter Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 130 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units Security Escort Supervision Duration Specific transmitter types periodically transmit supervisory messages so the system can monitor their function and location The supervisory feature must be enabled in the transmitter For transmitters with the supervisory feature enabled select the interval for these Supervisory messages from the drop down list The values for the drop down list are None 10 Seconds 30 Seconds 90 Seconds and 1 Hour The supervision period specific to the assigned transmitter must be selected if this feature is used Name The individual or item assigned to this transmitter This is a required field Address Address of this individual or item within the protected area The first address line on the left side which is not the home address is shown on the alarm screen City City of this individual or item within the protected area State State of this individual or item withi
63. personal data No receiver icons Show tests on the map All Pager Confm Not Reqd Suppress Lanyard Alarm Suppress Man Down Alarm Auto silence alarm in X seconds Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 121 If this checkbox is checked the operator will be prompted to complete an alarm report when the alarm is reset from the screen If the responding officer is required to complete the report or if no system report is desired this box should not be checked If the operator should complete the report then check this box If this checkbox is checked then alarms transmitted by security or watchman transmitters are to be silent alerting the operator at the Central Console but not sounding the sirens of the alert units or the horns in the receivers If this checkbox is checked then alarms transmitted by transmitters issued to installing company representatives and visitors are to be silent alerting the operator at the Central Console but not sounding the sirens of the alert units or the horns in the receivers Typically this checkbox would be checked If this checkbox is checked then predefined sound WAV files can be played at the alarm console for specific alarm types Typically this checkbox would not be checked If this checkbox is checked then personal height build hair and eye color data will be displayed on the alarm screen If this checkbox is checked then individual receiver
64. personnel transmitter Features Personal duress alarm transmitter Man down alarm Lanyard pull alarm optional Allows user to test from anywhere within the protected area Notifies Central Console of user s name and location immediately on alarm Post alarm and supervision tracking alarm map recall and more Internal antenna User replaceable battery with four year life Belt clip attachment Optional silent manual alarm Low battery indication Optional holster for common security belt sizes Description The SE2 personnel transmitter contains a unigue code which is associated with the user at the time the transmitter is assigned When the user generates an alarm this code is sent to the Central Console The Central Console graphically displays the user s location on a map along with the user s picture and his or her name and any other necessary information Transmitting an alarm There are three ways in which an alarm may be generated depending on the features enabled on the transmitter The types of alarms are as follows Manual duress alarm An alarm can be initiated by pressing the large button on the transmitter Man down alarm The transmitter will transmit an alarm to the Central Console if it is tipped 60 from upright Lanyard pull A cord connected to the pin inserted in the base of the transmitter can be looped around a utility belt and if the pin is removed from the transmitter such as when the tr
65. placed on the normal 90 m 300 ft grid except for the first row of receivers adjacent to the building This first row of outdoor receivers in the transition area should split the difference between the indoor and outdoor spacing at about 60 m 200 ft Boundary areas at the outer edge of the protected area The system cannot locate an alarm past the last receiver at the boundary of the protected area Therefore the last row of receivers must be at or past the end of the protected area Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 30 4 1 1 en System wiring System wiring General guidelines Security Escort After the site survey and special pre construction verifications has been completed the wiring can be run between the proposed locations of the system components and the Central Console See specific installation instructions accompanying each component for wiring details The following table indicates the specifications for the wiring Application Diagram Gauge Conductors Maximum Notes From To Ref Distance Transponder Transformer 1 1 5 mm 2 15 m 50 ft Standard 16 lamp cord AWG Alert Unit 2 1 2 mm 4 900 m 3000 Solid not 18 ft per bus twisted not AWG shielded Receiver 2 1 2 mm 4 900 m 3000 Solid not 18 ft per bus twisted not AWG shielded SE485 3 0 5 mm 4wire 2 See IMPORTANT 24 twisted pair Transponder M
66. problem Alarm type label 5 False alarm Alarm type label 6 Alarm demonstration Alarm type label 7 Other problem sve Figure 7 8 System Label Dialog 7 10 Subscriber Database A subscriber is anyone who has been issued a Security Escort transmitter This database includes all transmitters assigned in the system whether they are protecting people or things The Subscriber Database is very similar to the Operator Database the method by which the names and other information are stored is virtually identical Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 126 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units r Find Subscriber s Database Security Escort Transmitter Type transmitter Subscriber Type Security Disability No handicap I Disabled Silent Supervision Duration 30 Seconds Name Sgt John Young Addr Security Department Home Name Sgt John Young Addr 21 Oak St City Rochester StatelNY City State Zip Phone 1911 Zip 14604 Phone 716 244 4301 Subscriber ID 063 240918 Transmitter ID 000000033 Total Tests Ba 20 Reset Last Test 11 28 Mon May 18 2015 Modify Operator 7 Last Check in Created 00 23 Tue Sep 19 2000 LOW BATTERY Clear Modified 00 52 Fri Jan 05 2001 11 28 Mon May 18 2015 Trans change 00 52 Fri Jan 05 2001 Record size 322 Subscriber Information Version 1 Beginning Previous Next End
67. register This setting controls the time spacing in minutes for entries of the guard s current location in the automatically generated guard tour report Therefore if set to 15 minutes an entry will be generated each 15 minutes that the guard s transmitter is within range of the system This setting controls the time spacing in minutes for entries of the guard s current location in the automatically generated guard tour report Therefore if set to 15 minutes an entry will be generated each 15 minutes that the guard s transmitter is within range of the system Each yellow pop up trouble box that is displayed on the Central Console advises of system problems containing specific instructions for the operator Entries in this text box will be displayed in the pop up trouble boxes whenever a system problem occurs that requires attention This information usually includes the name and telephone number of the designated Security Escort maintenance technicians System Defaults dialog This dialog allows the names for each class of subscribers to be changed to match the specific application of this Security Escort System Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 124 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units gt j P Edit System Specific Preferences i W To OE D 7 9 Security Escort Subscriber class 1 Commuter Subscriber class 2 Faculty Subscriber
68. related alarm map screens Master Database drive Store the backup files in the Security Escort Master Database path See the System Directories and Network Address dialog Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 180 en System menus and dialogs Security Escort 8 2 2 Slave Database drive Store the backup files in the Security Escort Slave Database path See the System Directories and Network Address dialog Local Escort drive Store the backup files in the save sub directory as the Security Escort System components are stored on this computer typically C ESCORT Cartridge disk drive Store the backup files in the Backup restore to disk cartridge path assigned in the System Preferences dialog This path may point to a cartridge disk drive to a local hard disk or to a network disk drive Floppy A Store the backup files on the floppy disk in floppy disk drive A Backup When the Backup button is clicked all databases selected with a checkmark will be saved to the destination selected on the right Restore dialog Should one or more database files become corrupted or erased due to a hard drive failure power surges or other unpredictable events it is necessary to restore the databases from backup files The Restore function allows loading of selected databases from backup files It is not necessary to perform the Restore function on all databases in order to restore any one All changes that o
69. report location is shown Locate transmitters Figure 8 2 Locate Transmitters Maintenance alarm database Maintenance transmitters when activated in the Test or Alarm mode generate a series of multiple data packets like subscriber transmitters However a special code in each packet identifies the transmitter as a Maintenance Transmitter The receiver responds to a maintenance Alarm or Test transmission in the same way it responds to a subscriber Alarm or Test unless the receiver has been put in the Setup mode The transponder then reports the maintenance transmitter identification number and all signal levels to the Central Console which then creates the location estimate and processes the data as it would for a normal alarm 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort System menus and dialogs en 175 Notice All maintenance transmitters are assumed to be valid so there is no need for the Central Console to check for the identification number in the Subscriber Database 1st Floor Main Lobby Area EER EE j TTL S Figure 8 3 Maintenance Alarm With Signal Levels Shown in Icons The Central Console will not generate an audible alert for the operator nor will it create an alarm display on the main Central Console screen Because the
70. shorted loop on this transmitter will not cause an alarm or trouble report to be displayed For this option to be enabled the transmitter s class must be set to Point type Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 138 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units Security Escort Alarm on shorted loop Trouble on shorted loop Alarm when armed Trouble when disarmed on shorted loop Disable open loop Alarm on open loop Trouble on open loop Alarm when armed Trouble when disarmed on open loop Fixed location and pager text Transponder name If selected and the alarm group where this transmitter is assigned to is armed then a shorted loop on this transmitter will cause an alarm report to be displayed The alarm group this transmitter is assigned to must be armed for this input to cause an alarm which is displayed If no alarm group is assigned the transmitter is always armed For this option to be enabled the transmitter s class must be set to Point type If selected a shorted loop on this transmitter will cause a trouble report to be displayed For this option to be enabled the transmitter s class must be set to Point type If selected and the alarm group where this transmitter is assigned to is armed then a shorted loop on this transmitter will cause an alarm report to be displayed If selected and the alarm group where this
71. should contain only numeric ASCII characters Fixed Map X Location AJ This field may contain only numeric ASCII characters Fixed Map Y Location AK This field may contain only numeric ASCII characters Fixed Bitmap Number AL 0 99 This field may contain only numeric ASCII characters Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 152 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units Security Escort Data fields in required Excel Restrictions order Column Supervision Interval AM O None 1 is 90 Second Supervision 2 is 30 Second Supervision 3 is 1 Hour Supervision This field may contain only numeric ASCII characters Alarm Group AN 0 99 This field may contain only numeric ASCII characters Shorted Loop AO This field may contain only numeric ASCII characters Open Loop AP This field may contain only numeric ASCII characters Status AQ Encoded value Do not change Enable Magnetic Reed AR This field may contain only numeric ASCII characters Fixed Location Text AS This field may be up to 254 characters This field may contain any printable ASCII character except the Magnetic Reed Text AT This field may be up to 30 characters This field may contain any printable ASCII character except the Shorted Loop Text AU This field may be up to 30 characters Th
72. spacing is important Do not place receivers significantly closer in one section of a building than another section Number of outdoor receivers 30 L 1902 Irinn nay l gt I a d B B IE N en a Bs D 3 m a Receivers FI F al Om 90 m H 200 Ny oa RY To estimate the number of receivers first read Outdoor receiver installation Assume a maximum receiver spacing of 90 m 300 ft between receivers in both directions for receivers that are not within 30 m 100 ft of a building with inside coverage Receivers within 30 m 100 ft of a building should be spaced the same as receivers in the building spacing the outside receivers at a somewhat larger spacing is acceptable in most cases Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 26 en Eguipment estimation location accuracy and receiver location Security Escort 3 3 3 3 1 An outside area directly between two buildings with inside protection will need no additional receivers if the buildings are 90 m 300 ft or less apart If the buildings are more than 90 m 300 ft apart the outside receivers should be evenly spaced between the buildings Make sure the standard 90 m 300 ft spacing is not exceeded For spacing outside adjacent to a covered building start the 90 m 300 ft spacing at the building wall Allowance for special coverage requirements For purposes of the bid the number of receivers estimated above shou
73. test 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 99 LED Function Alarm in Progress This LED comes on whenever a transmitter is in alarm It stays on for the duration of the transponder s involvement in the alarm then it goes out If an alarm is received while another alarm is in progress the Alarm in Progress LED goes out momentarily then stays on as long as any alarms are active in the transponder An alarm that causes the receiver sounders to stay on keeps the Alarm in Progress LED on Silent alarms or alarms from unauthorized transmitters cause the Alarm in Progress LED to turn on and to go out when the Central Console acknowledges the alarm message This also occurs for every alarm follower message A maintenance alarm message causes the Alarm in Progress LED to come on for 5 sec to 10 sec then to automatically go off Heartbeat Flashes at a fixed rate to indicate the microprocessor is operating normally If this LED stops flashing the transponder is not operational Turn it off for 5 sec using the power switch Then turn it back on If the LED does not flash the transponder should have the AC power and the back up battery disconnected Wait a few seconds and then reconnect If the LED does not flash at this time the transponder should be replaced Bus 0 to 7 Normally these LEDs are on if the cor
74. test mode above except that only transmissions with an adequate receive margin are sounded This indicates the maximum acceptable spacing of receivers Use the following procedure to test the spacing of receivers 1 2 3 4 Mount the first receiver Take the second receiver and a transmitter a distance away from the first receiver Activate the transmitter If receiver 1 sounds the test beeps receiver 2 is within range Repeat this test until receiver 1 no longer sounds the test beeps Move back to the last location where receiver 1 received the test beeps This location marks the maximum spacing between receivers Mount receiver 2 at this location or closer to receiver 1 Notice Do not use the test mode jumper P4 to determine receiver spacing iil G Figure 4 6 Receiver Spacing Wi Mm 1 Receiver 1 stops sounding the test beeps when receiver 2 is moved past this point Receiver 2 at maximum range 2 Receiver 1 Receiver 2 beyond maximum range 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort System wiring en 43 4 4 5 Pre wired installations When mounting the enclosure to a pre wired electrical box make sure that the electrical box has a six inch overhead clearance The enclosure should be mounted as shown below Back of AE100 Indoor Enclosure O O amp Use with single gang electrical boxes Use wit
75. the Backup button It is also wise to back up each database to a USB flash drive Mark the USB flash drive label with the databases and backup date 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 95 7 Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units 7 1 Common errors Transponder eS SS HE HE EE el el el el el el of l TT TAT AR sede OO 1 Wrong type of cable You must use twisted pair cable Common errors are that twisted pairs are not used or separate wires from more than one pair is used 2 Check to see if and are reversed or if TX and RX are reversed 3 The correct connections from the SE485 to the transponder are RX to TX and RX to TX 4 The cable should be straight through to your computer serial port connector Do not use a null modem cable or a cable marked for printer use 5 Switch set in the wrong position 6 DIP switch settings incorrect 7 Power Jumper not on 8 ON OFF switch not ON 9 Wrong point address 10 Forgot to put on the tamper spring 7 2 Built in troubleshooting aids 7 2 1 Receiver Jumpers There are two groups of jumpers on the EA102A 304 receiver The first group contains jumpers Pi through P3 The second contains jumpers P4 through P8 The function of each jumper is indicated in the table below Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training
76. the LEDs are lit but the receiver fails to respond to the maintenance alarm there may be a problem with the receiver board or another receiver is receiving the signal stronger Repeat the above sequence starting with step 1 for all transponders and receivers in the system Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 110 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units Security Escort 7 5 7 5 1 Note The illuminated LEDs indicate to the service person standing near the device that the receiver is actually the one currently in the setup mode If the LEDs of the designated receiver are not illuminated there is probably an error in the switch settings of the receiver or an error in the address in the Transponder Database To help resolve such problems the person at the Central Console can command any device to illuminate its LED s and or sound its horn Post construction setup Testing the location accuracy of an installation Notice Before doing any of the following testing it is important to verify that every receiver in the system is functioning correctly using the procedure described in the Security Escort Hardware Installation Manual Additionally every receiver must be programmed in the Transponder Database with its actual physical location and floor level It is also important that receivers that are physically stacked directly above one another on floors of a building are als
77. the best indoor and outdoor location or an indoor only system Mount the indoor receivers on the recommended 25 m 80 ft grid with the last row of indoor receivers on the outside wall of the building Do this even if the building is less than 25 m 80 ft wide or long There should be a receiver at each outside corner of a building Handling two protected buildings sharing a common wall with floor levels that do not match Ask the customer which building has areas of greater concern and favor the recommended mounting heights in that building The recommended 25 m 80 ft maximum indoor spacing grid should be maintained throughout both buildings as if the wall in question was not there Mounting heights only for those receivers at or near within 6 m 20 ft the wall in question should be affected Mounting heights for all other receivers in the buildings must follow the indoor recommendation Mark the recommended mounting height for receivers on the higher floor level and also mark the recommended mounting height for receivers on the lower floor level Mount the receiver at its normal grid location midway between these two heights but not above the ceiling level of the lower floor Outdoor receiver installation Outdoor receivers must be mounted in a evenly spaced grid no more than 90 m 300 ft apart Outdoor receivers must be mounted 3 m 10 ft above the ground Receivers must not be mounted within 30 cm 1 ft of any metal object inclu
78. used to enter specific information about the holder of this transmitter Car type parking sticker number license number and medical information are examples of the types of information typically entered Each field typically holds different information The installer can change the field labels to labels that would define your intended usage Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 132 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units Security Escort 7 10 4 r ity i Sgt John Young Security Phone 1911 Security Department Field 1 Field 2 93 Black Toyota Pickup Truck Plate 7246 JU New York Field 3 jyoung northpoint edu Field 4 Figure 7 12 Information Entry Screen Done Clicking the Done button closes the information entry dialog and returns to the Edit Subscriber s Database Record dialog Clicking the Save button saves all changes to the database Subscriber images This software does not capture the images it displays images that were previously captured by some other means The subscriber image can be captured using a digital camera video capture board etc The source of the image is not critical We have not identified nor require a specific manufacturer of the image capture equipment The images must be saved individually in JPG format The images should not be larger that 160 pixels wide and 160 pixels high I
79. will automatically synchronize the time on the slave and workstation computers once each night If this option is checked the master computer will reset when communication failure occurs The IP address of the master computer The Security Escort system requires a fixed IP address for the master computer A unique number that indicates the Security Escort software is attempting to set up a connection Other software uses different port numbers allowing the network interface card to be shared with other network applications Typically this is set as 4561 The IP address of the slave computer The Security Escort system requires a fixed IP address for the optional slave computer A unique number that indicates the Security Escort software is attempting to set up a connection Other software uses different port numbers allowing the network interface card to be shared with other network applications Typically this is set to 4561 Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 212 en System menus and dialogs Learn address Remote Control Listening Port Master Database path Autobackup to the slave database Security Escort Clicking this button on the master computer automatically populates the master s IP address in the Master s Network Address textbox and the master s network port in the Master s Network Listen Port textbox Clicking this button on the slave compu
80. will consider the master computer as being back in operation As such the slave computer disconnects all the devices and reguests the master computer to take control of the devices Manual redundancy Manual redundancy is only applicable to the following circumstances dis RS232 connected to either master or slave computer Switch the RS232 connection manually to the other computer Newly RS232 connected computer takes control The newly RS232 connected computer will inform the other computer to lose their control The other computer will disconnect all the devices The newly connected RS232 system will connect and take control of the devices Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 174 en System menus and dialogs Security Escort 8 1 1 8 1 2 System menus and dialogs File menu Utilities Logout Setup Printer Ne Locate transmitters Maintenance alarm database Operator database Reports database Subscriber database Transponder database Transmitter Change Exit Figure 8 1 File Menu Locate transmitters This selection allows the operator to display the last reported location of the transmitter assigned to the indicated individual or asset When the individual or asset is selected from the list the time of the last supervision report is shown or None is displayed if no supervision report was received from that transmitter On the map the last
81. 0 DOC 150 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units Security Escort Data fields in required Excel Restrictions order Column Build Code AC O Medium 1 Slim 2 Large This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Hair Color AD O Brown 1 Auburn 2 Black 3 Blond 4 Brunet 5 Grey 6 Red This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Eye Color AE O Brown 1 Blue 2 Green 3 Hazel 4 Grey This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Pager Group A AF 0 99 This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Pager Group B AG 0 99 This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Pager Group C AH 0 99 This field may contain only numeric ASCII characters 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 151 Data fields in required Excel Restrictions order Column Fixed Floor Level Al O Basement5 1 Basement4 2 Basement3 3 Basement2 4 Basementi 5 Tunnel 6 Basement 7 Ground 8 Outside 9 Floor 1 10 Floor 2 11 Floor 3 12 Floor 4 13 Floor 5 14 Floor 6 15 Floor 7 16 Floor 8 17 Floor 9 18 Floor 10 19 Floor 11 20 Floor 12 21 Floor 13 22 Floor 14 23 Floor 15 24 Floor 16 25 Floor 17 26 Floor 18
82. 0 to 99 desensitize the receiver to 50 to 99 of the actual received signal strength Settings of 1 to 49 increase the sensitivity to 101 to 149 of the actual received signal strength Try changing the sensitivity of receivers one at a time while testing the alarm location response For example if alarms are being pulled towards a particular receiver lower its sensitivity in 10 increments and retest If the area can be corrected using this method verify the surrounding areas to make sure they have not been adversely affected Generally it is better if the correction is done in small steps while verifying the adjacent areas rather than trying to correct the entire error in one step The SA option is only available if the Enable algorithm tweaks checkbox is checked in the System Preferences dialog Also in the Transponder Database the Algorithm dropdown list Medium or Strong pull location 6 a allows selection of Default Classic Linear Low algorithms for each transmitter The point reporting the best reception level determines the actual algorithm used for the location on any event If programmed as Default the algorithm used is Linear for points programmed as outdoor or tunnel All other points use Low If the point reporting the best reception level is not programmed for the Default algorithm the location calculation uses the algorithm programmed Other miscellaneous
83. 1 Report statistics Clicking the Statistics button summarizes all the alarm reports that are captured in the database The alarm reports statistics window lists the number of alarms reports according to their problem types Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 170 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units Security Escort Unknown Person threatened Accident person Accident auto Medical problem False alarm Alarm demonstration SE o o o MEE EE a 7 a Other problem Figure 7 31 Alarm Report Statistics 7 15 2 Map The act of resetting an alarm causes a report to be saved into the Reports Database A part of the alarm report record is a copy of the alarm screen that is displayed at the time of the incident Clicking the Map button reconstructs the screen as it appeared to the dispatcher File Utilities Logout Setup Printer Network About LANYARD ALARM 1st Floor Main Entrance amp Accounting Area Alarm History Etna Anne Black Alarm received E Admissions Rm 100 11 16 57 Mon May 10 2075 it 2500 018 63 8130 Cancel Figure 7 32 Active Alarm Map 7 15 3 Edit data Select the appropriate problem type and then enter the name of the officer who responded to the alarm Finish with a description of the problem and the action taken Save the updated record by clicking the Save button
84. 1 Zip 14604 Phonel716 244 4301 Subscriber ID 063 240918 Transmitter ID 000000033 Statistics Total Tests Ba 20 Reset Data Merge Last Test 11 28 Mon May 18 2015 Modify Operator Poo Import Export Last Check in fs Insert New Created 00 23 Tue Sep 19 2000 LOW BATTERY Clear Edit Data Modified 00 52 Fri Jan 05 2001 11 28 Mon May 18 2015 Delete Trans change 00 52 Fri Jan 05 2001 Record size 322 Locate Key _key Select Subscriber Information version 1 Key Select Figure 7 23 Find Subscriber s Database Record Dialog File format of TABMERGE DAT TABMERGE_EXPORT DAT The file of data record entries used for export import and merge must be in tab delimited text format For data merge and import It must be placed in the Security Escort folder typically C ESCORT and named as TABMERGE DAT For export functionality the exported file is named as TABMERGE EXPORT DAT Both file formats are the same The data fields must be in the following order delimited by the horizontal tab character decimal 8 and the record must be terminated with a carriage return decimal 13 If a data field has no data just store the terminating tab character for that field The total number of characters in all the fields of a record must be 255 characters or less including the tab and carriage return characters Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 148
85. 2 Index en 229 K Key Select 172 Kill Transponder 81 Known transmitters 193 L Lantronix interface DB25 pinouts 51 wiring 50 Last 145 Last MUX message 196 Last Remote Access Time 203 Learn address button 212 LF Only 72 Limit alarms to 1 transponder 120 Limit alarms to one area 120 Linear algorithm 87 Linear depth 117 Load delay 195 Local Escort drive 180 Local Escort path 213 Locate 89 137 Locate Key 171 Locate test level 123 Locate transmitters 174 Location 86 estimate of 174 Text to be displayed 86 Location accuracy 23 26 110 112 Location algorithm 87 Login changes 189 Loop communications 194 Low battery alert unit 193 transponder 192 Low battery report 183 Low depth 118 Low pull algorithm 87 Lowest 202 Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 230 en Index M Maintenance alarm 175 Maintenance alarm 115 174 Maintenance transmitter 199 use in setup mode 199 Male 130 Man down Alarm On Auto track 120 Man down delay timer X seconds 122 Man down jitter timer X seconds 122 Manual redundancy 173 Map 87 alarm 170 Map file generation 68 Map file scaling 68 Map number 137 Map scale 117 Map X position 137 Map Y position 137 Master computer 73 Master computer answers 73 Master computer switch 189 Master Database drive 179 Master Database path 212 Master s Network Address 211 Master s Network
86. 207 Demo lanyard alarm 216 Demo low battery 217 Demo maintenance alarm 217 Demo maintenance test 217 Demo man down alarm 216 Demo man down restoral 216 Demo manual alarm 216 Demo Test 216 Demo test subscriber 216 Demo trouble restorals 217 Demo troubles 217 Dialing prefix 73 Direct connect port 73 Disability 129 Disable auto reconnect 211 Disable idle processing 115 Disable on shorted loop 137 Disable open loop 138 Disabled 74 129 Disarm Time 143 Display maintenance alarm 115 Display unauthorized alarms 120 Do not resend alarm page 207 Done 132 140 Security Escort E Edit Data 81 170 Edit operator record 166 Edit Schedule Times 141 Edit Schedule Times dialog 142 EE counters 196 EE point info 196 EE point stat 196 EE point trouble 196 Emergency answer only 73 Enable algorithm tweaks 115 Enable Rec 201 Enable reed switch 137 Enable remote key 195 End of File 81 End of shift reminder 122 Equipment estimation general 24 Excel test history files 116 Export 184 Exporting a Subscriber Database 146 Exporting a Transponder Database 155 Exporting the Subscriber Database 153 Exporting the Transponder Database 164 Eye Color 130 F Fail to test letters 184 Failed pager attempts 203 Failed to Check in Report 140 Female 130 File menu 174 Files reguired 220 Filter virtual fence 120 139 First 144 Fixed location and pager text 138 Fixed location transmitter 137
87. 4 receiver 39 4 4 1 Specifications 39 4 4 2 Mounting 39 4 4 3 Wiring 40 4 4 4 Switches and jumpers 41 4 4 5 Pre wired installations 43 Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 4 en Table of Contents 4 4 6 4 5 4 5 1 4 5 2 4 5 3 4 5 4 4 5 5 4 6 4 6 1 4 6 2 4 6 3 4 7 4 7 1 4 7 2 4 7 3 4 8 4 8 1 4 8 2 4 8 3 4 9 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 4 1 5 4 2 6 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 4 1 6 4 2 6 4 3 6 4 4 6 4 5 6 4 6 6 5 7 7 1 7 2 7 2 1 7 2 2 7 3 7 3 1 7 3 2 7 3 3 7 3 4 Security Escort Drilling templates 43 EA120B alert unit 45 Specifications 45 General information 46 Mounting 46 Wiring 47 Set the address 47 Moxa interface 47 Introduction 47 Specifications 48 Installation and operation notes 48 Lantronix interface 50 Introduction 50 Specifications 50 Installation and operation notes 50 SE485 interface 54 Introduction 54 Specifications 54 Installation and operation notes 54 ProxLink setup 55 Installation options 59 Demo installations 59 Non Network installations 59 Network installations 59 Installing the Security Escort software 60 Software installation procedure 60 Image files 68 Central Console computer setup and programming 70 Transponder comm port setup 70 Remote comm port setup dialog 70 Remote setup dialog 72 Transponder Database 75 Transponder information sheet 76 Transponder Database dialog 79 Creating a new transponder entry 82 Modifying exis
88. 5 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort 10 10 1 10 2 10 3 Appendix Software licenses en 225 Appendix Software licenses This product contains both software that is proprietary Bosch software licensed under the Bosch standard license terms and software licensed on the basis of other licenses Bosch software All Bosch software Bosch Security Systems Bosch software is licensed under the terms of the End User License Agreement EULA of Bosch Security Systems B V or Bosch Security Systems Inc as available together with the physical carrier CD or DVD Any use is subject to agreement and compliance with such EULA as applicable Other licenses copyright notices Bosch is committed to comply with the relevant terms of any open source license included in its products The open source licenses for Security Escort 2 15 are listed in the OpenSourceLicensing doc file in the Open Source folder of the CD ROM The relevant open source software or source code can also be obtained by downloading from the Bosch product catalog website Warranties and disclaimer of warranties Software provided under other licenses has specific disclaimers of warranties These are repeated in the full license texts and apply in full to the relevant software components All software components provided under the other licenses are provided as is without any warranty of any kind including but not limi
89. 6 en Central Console computer setup and programming Security Escort Selecting receiver as the Point Type Point or Area Data Point Type Transponder Point Locate Number 5 2 receiver Alert 1 J Bus 0 point5 Bus Bus Alet2 o out Algorithm Defaut Alert3 vo Floor level Basement5 Test Ln Location sasd0 Save Mapl0 Cancel Figure 6 9 Data Entry after Selection of Receiver Point Type i Copy Paste ig Each receiver can be assigned up to three alert units that are to be activated if it is one of the receivers reported by the transponder as part of an Alarm event Each receiver can also be assigned one alert unit that is to be activated to confirm Test transmissions These alert units need not be connected to the same transponder as the receiver To assign alert units to each receiver the drop down lists of Alert 1 Alert 2 and Alert 3 fields are used to select the transponder of the designated alert unit The point number can be keyed into the Point text box or click the button to display the receiver selection table Click the receiver number on the selection table dialog to populate the Point Number in the Point text box Similarly any alert unit whose strobe unit is to be activated in the event of a Test transmission from a transmitter can be assigned using the drop down lists of Test field Point or rea Data Point Type Transponder Point Locate Number 5 2
90. 64 73 Floor 65 74 Floor 66 75 Floor 67 76 Floor 68 77 Floor 69 78 Floor 70 79 Floor 71 80 Floor 72 81 Floor 73 82 Floor 74 83 Floor 75 84 Floor 76 85 Floor 77 86 Floor 78 87 Floor 79 88 Floor 80 89 Floor 81 90 Floor 82 91 Floor 83 92 Floor 84 93 Floor 85 94 Floor 86 95 Floor 87 96 Floor 88 97 Floor 89 98 Floor 90 99 Floor 91 100 Floor 92 101 Floor 93 102 Floor 94 103 Floor 95 104 Floor 96 105 Floor 97 106 Floor 98 107 Floor 99 This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Alert Unit 1 R This field contains the Transponder ID of the alert unit If this is not configured this field is O This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Alert Unit 1 Point S This field contains the alert unit point number If this is not configured this field is 1 This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Data fields in required order Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 159 Excel Column Restrictions Alert Unit 2 T This field contains the Transponder ID of the alert unit If this is not configured this field is O This
91. 80 Right C CO 60 Default Transmit ag C 40 Antenna Ambient Jamming Ant map Revision Jam map Cancel The history display shows maps from the selected transponder Figure 8 18 Receiver Configuration Dialog System menus and dialogs en 197 Advances to the next transponder in the system Cancels the operation and closes the dialog window Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 198 en System menus and dialogs Put this receiver in setup model Ambient value Auto Advance RF micro revision Horn Siren Red LED Strobe Green Led Off On Antenna Security Escort This button initiates the setup process by causing both the red and green LED of the selected receiver to light up The red and green LED will be flashing On the Central Console this button changes the Abort setup for this MUX Point button to be able to proceed to the next device in the event that one receiver is not set up properly The Ambient value shown above Auto Advance shows the current ambient level at the receiver To get an updated ambient reading select the point and click the Transmit button followed by the Ambient button If this checkbox is checked the Central Console automatically selects the receiver with the next higher point address The receiver s RF micro revision level is shown below Auto Advance To get an updated reading click th
92. 9 Floor 1 10 Floor 2 11 Floor 3 12 Floor 4 13 Floor 5 14 Floor 6 15 Floor 7 16 Floor 8 17 Floor 9 18 Floor 10 19 Floor 11 20 Floor 12 21 Floor 13 22 Floor 14 23 Floor 15 24 Floor 16 25 Floor 17 26 Floor 18 27 Floor 19 28 Floor 20 29 Floor 21 30 Floor 22 31 Floor 23 32 Floor 24 33 Floor 25 34 Floor 26 35 Floor 27 36 Floor 28 37 Floor 29 38 Floor 30 39 Floor 31 40 Floor 32 41 Floor 33 42 Floor 34 43 Floor 35 44 Floor 36 45 Floor 37 46 Floor 38 47 Floor 39 48 Floor 40 49 Floor 41 50 Floor 42 51 Floor 43 52 Floor 44 53 Floor 45 54 Floor 46 55 Floor 47 56 Floor 48 57 Floor 49 58 Floor 50 59 Floor 51 60 Floor 52 61 Floor 53 62 Floor 54 63 Floor 55 64 Floor 56 65 Floor 57 66 Floor 58 67 Floor 59 68 Floor 60 69 Floor 61 70 Floor 62 71 Floor 63 72 Floor 64 73 Floor 65 74 Floor 66 75 Floor 67 76 Floor 68 77 Floor 69 78 Floor 70 79 Floor 71 80 Floor 72 81 Floor 73 82 Floor 74 83 Floor 75 84 Floor 76 85 Floor 77 86 Floor 78 87 Floor 79 88 Floor 80 89 Floor 81 90 Floor 82 91 Floor 83 92 Floor 84 93 Floor 85 94 Floor 86 95
93. Buffer Max Transmit Buffer Max Buffer Overflow Hardware Overrun TOE TE TE Total Remote Access Connections Yellow indicates a problem TEE Total Wrong Access Code Attempts Reset Status Refresh Data Last Remote Access Time Successful pager messages Cancel 1 Failed pager attempts Figure 8 21 Network Status Dialog 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Successful Incoming Messages Incoming Communication Errors Incoming Retried Messages Total Outgoing Messages Outgoing Retried Messages Receiver Buffer Max Transmit Buffer Max Buffer Overflow Hardware Overrun Total Remote Access Connections Total Wrong Access Code Attempts Last Remote Access Time Successful pager messages Failed pager attempts Reset Status Refresh Data Cancel System menus and dialogs en 203 This value is the number of messages that the system successfully received on this communication port This value is the number of messages that the system detected errors in on this communication port If displayed in yellow this value is more than 1 5 of the Successful Incoming Messages This value is number of successful receptions that indicated that they retried by the sending application If displayed in yellow this value is more than 1 5 of the Successful Incoming Messages This value is total number of outgoing messages sent on
94. Console After a few seconds delay the Central Console displays a pop up alert and the condition is recorded in the audit file The transponder immediately senses and reports the actuation of its tamper switch The Central Console immediately displays a pop up alert and records the condition in the audit file Tamper reports are not delayed by the pop up trouble and pager delay The transponder immediately senses and reports the activation shorting of its remote key input when it is enabled in the Transponder Parameter dialog The Central Console displays a pop up alert and records the condition in the audit file The transponder immediately senses and reports the fault open of its remote key input when it is enabled in the Transponder Parameter dialog The Central Console immediately displays a pop up alert and records the condition in the audit file The transponder reports to the Central Console when it first starts up This can be caused by a technician turning the transponder on or by a watchdog failure of the on board microprocessor The Central Console immediately displays a pop up alert and records the condition in the audit file When the transponder is unable to communicate to any receivers or alert units on one or more of its multiplex busses it immediately reports the condition to the Central Console The Central Console reports the condition by means of a pop up alert if the condition persists more than a few seconds The c
95. Database drive C Reports Cartridge disk drive Floppy A pe r C Transponders C Local Escort drive fo S Cc Clear entire file Figure 8 8 Backup Dialog When the Backup menu item is chosen options are presented to save the databases to the master or slave computer s hard drive a cartridge drive or to a floppy drive of this computer When saving to a floppy disk or cartridge drive verify that the appropriate disk or cartridge is inserted into the drive before clicking the Backup button To abort the process click the Cancel button in the dialog Only the databases with a checkmark will be backed up Typically all databases should be backed up at once Only when they do not fit on one floppy disk should you save individual databases to one floppy then switch floppy disks and repeat the procedure to save the rest of the files As insurance against database problems multiple backups to different disks should be made frequently At least one backup copy should be stored in a different location from this system remember to keep this copy current Operators This is the database of all of the individuals with passwords to operate the system software and acknowledge alarms Subscriber This database contains all of transmitters assigned in the system Transponders This database contains the configuration of the transponders receivers virtual receivers and alert units Reports This database contains all of the alarm reports and
96. DisarmTime hh mm 00 00 Day of the week Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Save Figure 7 18 Edit Schedule Time dialog 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort 7 11 3 Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 143 If both the Disarm Time and the Arm Time are programmed and the Disarm Time occurs before the Arm Time normal 8 to 5 style day the schedule will be active armed from midnight to the programmed Disarm Time The schedule will be off disarmed from the Disarm Time to the Arm Time The schedule will be active armed from the Arm Time to the end of the day If both the Disarm Time and the Arm Time are programmed and the Arm Time occurs before the Disarm Time the schedule is off disarmed from midnight to the programmed Arm Time The schedule is active armed from the Arm Time to the Disarm Time The schedule is off disarmed from the Disarm Time to the end of the day Arm Time This is the time that the schedule becomes active on or armed for the selected day of the week Times are expressed in 24 hour time 00 00 to 23 59 Disarm Time This is the time that the schedule goes off disarmed for the selected day of the week Times are expressed in 24 hour time 00 00 to 23 59 Day of the Week Select the day you desire to change the time for The Arm Time and Disarm Time are programmed separately
97. Incoming Messages Incoming Communications Errors Incoming Retried Messages Total Outgoing Messages Outgoing Retried Messages Receive Buffer Max Transmit Buffer Max Security Escort Socket number 1280 IP address 10 123 43 1 Port 14561 ho m ATTA a m Yellow indicates a problem Disconnect Previous Reset Status Next Refresh Data Figure 8 29 Current Network Socket Status Dialog Successful Incoming Messages Incoming Communication Errors Incoming Retried Messages Total Outgoing Messages Outgoing Retried Messages Receive Buffer Max Transmit Buffer Max Number of messages that the system has successfully received on this socket Number of messages that the system detected errors in on this socket If displayed in yellow this value is more than 1 5 of the Successful Incoming Messages Number of successful receptions which indicated that the retries by the sending application If displayed in yellow this value is more than 1 5 of the Successful Incoming Messages Total number of outgoing messages that were sent on this socket Number of outgoing messages that were retried because the receiving application did not acknowledge them If displayed in yellow this value is more than 1 5 of the Total Outgoing Messages Maximum number of bytes that were received on this serial port but not yet processed by the system If displayed in yellow more than 50 of the queue was in use
98. Listen Port 211 Max Low Battery Messages 204 Max Man Down Messages 204 Max Receiver Buffer 205 Max Report Spooler Bytes 205 Max Spooler Bytes 204 Max Test Strobe Messages 204 Max Transmit Buffer 205 Max transponders 219 Max workstations 219 Maximum Alarm Messages 204 Maximum Retry Messages 204 Maximum Trouble Messages 204 Maximum users 219 Medium depth 118 Medium pull algorithm 87 Merging a Subscriber Database 146 Merging the Subscriber Database 155 Midnight report 184 Minimum system requirements 11 Missed all receivers 201 Misses 201 modem 115 Modem communications 189 Modem init 74 207 Security Escort Modem Port 71 Modem reset 74 Modfying existing transponder 83 Modified 80 Modify Oper 80 Moinitor supervisions 115 Mon Power 70 Monitor communications 115 Monitored periods 193 Moxa interface DB9 pinouts 48 wiring 48 Moxa Lantronix troubleshooting 103 Multiple map files 68 Multiplex point address explanation of 81 Multiplex receiver for automatic ID capture 117 Multiplex receiver parameters 83 N Name 130 National Electrical Code 31 Network comm failure 193 Network communications 189 Network Port 71 Network status dialog 202 New alarm reports 183 New ID 130 Next 81 145 195 197 No buddy check delay 115 No CTS 70 No password on reentry 116 No password timeout 116 No password to exit 116 No point text if area text 120 No receiver icons 121 No response
99. Management Driver 4 28 2015 1 67 09 03 RICOH_Media_Driver_v2 25 18 01 RICOH 4 27 2015 2251801 E Security Escort Bosch Security Systems 4 28 2015 2 15 0 0 b ThinkPad UitraNav Driver 4 27 2015 464MB 1621914 use Enhanced Performance Keyboard Lenovo 4 27 2015 150MB 2 0 2 2 Adobe Systems Incorporated Product version 15 007 20033 Support link http www adobe com p gt Help link http www adobe com Update information http helpx adobe com reader html Figure 5 11 Control Panel Click the Turn Windows features on or off link on the left of the window The Windows Features dialog appears Look for the Microsoft NET Framework 3 5 1 entry and ensure that the related checkboxes are selected F fal Windows Features Turn Windows features on or off To turn a feature on select its check box To turn a feature off clear its check box A filled box means that only part of the feature is turned on N Indexing Service VI Internet Explorer 8 d Internet Information Services EIL Internet Information Services Hostable Web Core Media Features d Microsoft NET Framework 3 5 1 WI Windows Communication Foundation HTTP Activation v Windows nmunication Foundation Non HTTP Activ di Microsoft Message Queue MSMQ Server N Print and Document Services Remote Differential Compression mm Figure 5 12 Windows Features Dialog Click th
100. Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 96 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units Security Escort Jumper Operation with Jumper in Place P1 Sounder is enabled P2 Green LED is enabled P3 Red LED is enabled PAS Test mode is enabled P5 Receiver spacing mode is enabled P6 Left antenna is disabled P7 Right antenna is disabled P8 Do not place a jumper across these pins Notice Remove jumpers P1 P2 and P3 when installed in an outdoor enclosure Remove jumpers P4 P5 P6 and P7 for normal operation Test mode Each EA102A receiver provides a test mode that may be used to check the unit s functionality The module goes into test mode when jumper P4 is in place jumper P5 removed In this mode all test and alarm receptions will be sounded Notice The sounder and LEDs jumpers P1 P2 and P3 must also be enabled to operate the test mode Each receiver should be tested using the following method test only one receiver at a time 1 Enable the test mode by placing the jumper P4 across both pins jumper P5 removed The red LED will turn ON and stay ON during the test This indicates that power is properly connected and the receiver is in test mode If the red LED does not come on check the POWER and POWER wiring to this receiver Also verify the corresponding transponder bus enable jumper is in place and the transponder is on and power
101. Master Database drive Slave Database drive Local Escort drive Cartridge disk drive This is the database of all of the individuals with passwords to operate the system software and acknowledge alarms This database contains all of transmitters assigned in the system This database contains the configuration of the transponders receivers virtual receivers and alert units This database contains all of the alarm reports and related alarm map screens Store the backup files in the Security Escort Master Databasepath See the System Directories and Network Address dialog Store the backup files in the Security Escort Slave Databasepath See the System Directories and Network Address dialog Store the backup files in the save sub directory as the Security Escort System components are stored on this computer typically C ESCORT Store the backup files in the Backup restore to disk cartridge path assigned in the System Preferences dialog This path may point to a cartridge disk drive to a local hard disk or to a network disk drive Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 182 en System menus and dialogs 8 2 3 Floppy A Clear entire file Restore Security Escort Store the backup files on the floppy disk in floppy disk drive A If selected and the Restore button clicked then that entire database will be cleared of all records This selection must be used with
102. Number AD 0 99 This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Point Number 1 AE This field must be 1 the point number This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Point Type AF O receiver 1 Alert unit 2 Virtual 7 None This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 160 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units Security Escort Data fields in required Excel Restrictions order Column Algorithm Number AG O Default 1 Classic 2 Linear 3 Low 4 Medium 5 Strong This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Floor AH O Basement5 1 Basement4 2 Basement3 3 Basement2 4 Basementi 5 Tunnel 6 Basement 7 Ground 8 Outside 9 Floor 1 10 Floor 2 11 Floor 3 12 Floor 4 13 Floor 5 14 Floor 6 15 Floor 7 16 Floor 8 17 Floor 9 18 Floor 10 19 Floor 11 20 Floor 12 21 Floor 13 22 Floor 14 23 Floor 15 24 Floor 16 25 Floor 17 26 Floor 18 27 Floor 19 28 Floor 20 29 Floor 21 30 Floor 22 31 Floor 23 32 Floor 24 33 Floor 25 34 Floor 26 35 Floor 27 36 Floor 28 37 Floor 29 38 Floor 30 39 Floor 31 40 Floor 32 41 Floor 33 42 Floor 34 43 Floor 35 44 Floor 36 45 Floor 37
103. O EDB is the default map file usually the ground floor The Security Escort software shows the default map if there are no other events being processed at a given time 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Installation options en 69 Assign the desired map number to an area or point in the Transponder Database Assign the map for a fixed location transmitter in the Subscriber Database Advanced dialog Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 70 en Central Console computer setup and programming Security Escort 6 Central Console computer setup and programming 6 1 Transponder comm port setup Go to menu Setup gt Transponder comm port setup This dialog connects the communication port indexes set for each transponder in the Transponder Database to the physical communication ports on the computer r Index A IndB IndC Index L None E G None COM 1 C COM1 COM 2 COM 2 COM 3 COM 3 COM 4 COM 4 COM 5 COM 5 COM 6 COM 6 COM 7 COM 7 COM 8 COM 8 COM 9 COM 9 COM 10 COM 10 COM 11 COM 11 COM 12 COM 12 COM 13 COM 13 COM 14 COM 14 COM 15 COM 15 COM 16 COM 16 T a o DI DI 3 D DI CO ND NA AL N AT DI 33 NON AR wnn Z 33 CO NO NA ht WN A Z aon OUMA AA wn Z CO NO UA AU N Z NON Aa WNT CO N OUMA AA wnt Z CO NOU AU N 4 Z CO N OUMA AU N Z NO TA AU Ne Z wo wo D N N oo _ ow
104. ON ON ON ON NE Om OE OE OE H N WO HO HO EO HO EO KI EIE KIE EO EE EO EE HIE EO EIE EO EE EE EO EE EE gy gas o Ce ON ON CE ON ON ON ON ON ON ON CE CECE ON ON ON ON ON ON CeCe ON OWN ON ON ON ON CeCe Om OE ag as8 fo a SOROS OBR ERR RR RRR RB EBBABBEKSBKSHRS SG HE FOS x M Ce ON MO WO ON ON HI EO ON ON EO ee ON EIE ON OE EI EO OE ONE ee EE D OE CON ON ON WO NI HO EO ON ON ON CON MIE HO EI OE ON OE OE EO EO ee EE O L OE ON ON ON ON OE ON ON EO EO EI EI EO EI HO EI ON COE OE OE NE COE OE EO BO EO EO EO EE IO EE Oe ON CON CON ON CON CON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ONE WIN EO HIE HO EI EI EO EO EI EI EO EIE v MI CO MO HO NO EO HI EI HI EO EO EO EI EI EIE HOE EO HI EIE EO EO EO EI EI EI EO EO EO EO EE we t CO ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON CON ON ON ON ON ON NON CEOE OE NE ON OE OE CECE Ce CeCe ONCE Ce OM ON ON CON CON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OE COE OE CE OCE OE CeCe CE OE OE CECE Ce CeCe ONCE Po n ap o oc SRSSSBRSSBSSIEUSSSSSPCRSSESBSSSSESRSSIVS T 2 S Ee oo MO ON EO ON EO ON EO OE HO OE EO ee eel dd Lie ed ONE EO ON ON HO EO OE ONE EO OE OE EI EO OE ONE EO ON OE EO EO OE OE EE OE OE EE a oe o da LL ON ON Om mO NO HO WO OE ON ON OE HE HO EO OE O O O O O O O OE OE OE OE EO EO O EE O at e o p O Oo Oo ON ON ON CE ON ON ON EO HI EI EI HI EO HO EO OE ON OE OE NE OE OE EI EIE EO EI EI EI EE 2 ss a K j ON ON ON CE CE ON CE CE ON CE CE CE CE CE CE EO HIE HO HIE HOE EO EO EE EE EE ME 5 t w ON Cl ON ON ON ON ON OE ON
105. Problem Type Subscriber Type by using the Sort By drop down list You can change the report name and file location by pressing the ellipsis button Clicking the Export button saves the report to the specified file Clicking the Cancel button cancels the report generation and exits from the dialog window Clear Screen To clear the screen of any outdated or unwanted data choose this feature from the Utilities menu The screen automatically resets to its normal operations mode Output verification When selected the system is scanned to verify that all alarm outputs are in the correct state Any output found in the wrong state is corrected Synchronize System Time Selecting this option on the master computer causes the time on the slave and all of the workstation computers to be updated to the master computer s time Setup commands Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 186 en System menus and dialogs Security Escort 8 3 1 Show History When selected the default map display is replaced by a scrolling text window showing the most recent events that occurred in the system The window can list historical events and operations of the Central Console software Examples include list of any alarms and the actions taken name of person who logged into the Central Console changes to the database communication results between the devices and so on The events displayed can be selected in the Histo
106. Resolution by clicking the Start button Picture of the Start button clicking Control Panel and then under Appearance and Personalization clicking Adjust screen resolution Click Advanced settings and then click the Monitor tab Under Colors select True Color 32 bit and then click OK 256 color likely will produce undesirable results When in doubt set to High Color In the same dialog Desktop area can be set to 640x480 800x600 or 1024x768 pixels When the display is set to 640x480 not recommended the images are displayed on top of the map and therefore limit how much of the map displayed The 1024x768 setting may require too much memory for most video cards and show more of the map decreasing the size of the map details Most video cards can be set to 800x600 and when in doubt this setting should be selected If you can t choose these settings you video card or monitor setting may be incorrect refer to the system documentation to correct Fixed Location Transmitters Fixed location transmitter Phone number Floor level Basement5 Pager password Map X Position 0 Locate Pager ID Map Y Position 0 Pager Groups Hl Map number jo Pager Confirmation Not Requried Enable reed switch Optional text Disable shorted loop Alarm on shorted loop Optional text Trouble on shorted loop Alarm when armed Trouble when disarmed on shorted loop Disable open loop Alarm on open loop Optional text
107. Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Data fields in required order Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 161 Excel Column Restrictions Alert Unit 1 Point AJ This field contains the alert unit point number If this is not configured this field is 1 This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Alert Unit 2 AK This field contains the Transponder ID of the alert unit If this is not configured this field is O This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Alert Unit 2 Point AL This field contains the alert unit point number If this is not configured this field is 1 This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Alert Unit 3 AM This field contains the Transponder ID of the alert unit If this is not configured this field is O This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Alert Unit 3 Point AN This field contains the alert unit point number If this is not configured this field is 1 This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Alert Unit Test AO This field contains the Transponder ID of the alert unit If this is not configured this field is O This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Alert Unit Test Point AP This field contains the alert unit point number If this is not configured this field is 1 This field should contain only numeric
108. SCORT Importing the Transponder Database This section describes the information required to import data into the Transponder Database Notice There is no way to undo the operations Therefore it is recommended to perform a database backup prior to starting the task Upon completion of the task verify the updated data before the new database is placed in service If there are problems restore the Transponder Database from the backup 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 165 Notice Important Proceeding with the import operation will delete all existing records in Transponder Database The record entries in TRANSMERGE DAT are then imported to the Transponder Database validated by the Transponder ID The number of record entries that is imported is subject to the number of transponders allowed for the purchased license You can find this limit in the menu About gt About If this limit is reached during the import a pop up message appears to inform the user r Transponder database peu The transponder database has more records that this system is allowed Only users or operators who are assigned the minimum security level of Install is able to view the Transponder Database The file of data record entries must be placed in the Security Escort folder typica
109. Security Escort SE2000 Series BOSCH en Training Manual Security Escort Table of contents Table of Contents en 3 1 System overview 7 1 1 What is Security Escort 7 1 2 Emphasis on reliability 7 1 3 System applications 7 1 4 Some example installations T 1 5 Other system applications 8 1 6 Security Escort features 8 1 7 System components description 9 1 8 Compatible parts 10 2 System components specifications 11 2 1 Central Console 11 2 2 SE3 subscriber transmitter 12 2 3 SE2 personnel transmitter 14 2 4 SE3401 asset tracking transmitter 15 2 5 RF3401 asset tracking transmitter 16 2 6 SE88 panic transmitter 17 2h SEFD1 transmitter 18 2 8 EA102 receiver 19 2 9 EA500 transponder 20 2 10 EA120 alert unit 21 3 Equipment estimation location accuracy and receiver location 23 3 1 Location accuracy 23 3 2 Pre bid equipment estimation 24 3 2 1 Initial equipment estimate 24 3 3 Pre construction coverage verification survey 26 aa Verify each potential receiver location 26 3 3 2 Indoor receiver installation 28 3 3 3 Outdoor receiver installation 28 4 System wiring 30 4 1 General guidelines 30 4 1 1 Transponder SE485 wiring table 30 4 1 2 Observe established standards 31 4 2 Component wiring guidelines 31 4 2 1 General wiring diagram 31 4 2 2 Transponder information sheet 33 4 3 EA500 transponder 36 4 3 1 General 36 4 3 2 Specifications 36 4 3 3 Mounting 36 4 3 4 Wiring 36 4 3 5 Set the address 37 4 4 EA102A 30
110. Setup 134 Subscriber Database Advanced Features 135 Schedules dialog 140 Ignore Holidays for this schedule 141 Edit Schedule Times dialog 142 View Alarm Groups dialog 143 Alarm Groups dialog 144 Alarm Group State dialog 145 Current Check in Status dialog 145 Exporting importing and merging the Subscriber Database 146 File format of TABMERGE DAT TABMERGE_EXPORT DAT 147 Exporting the Subscriber Database 153 Importing the Subscriber Database 153 Merging the Subscriber Database 155 Exporting and importing the Transponder Database 155 File format of TRANSMERGE DAT TRANSMERGE_EXPORT DAT 156 Exporting the Transponder Database 164 Importing the Transponder Database 164 Operator Database 166 Edit Operator Database record 166 Authority levels 167 Reports Database 168 Report statistics 169 Map 170 Edit data 170 Delete 171 Locate Key 171 Key Select 172 Incomplete 172 System redundancy 172 Automatic redundancy 173 Manual redundancy 173 System menus and dialogs 174 File menu 174 Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 6 en Table of Contents 8 1 1 8 1 2 8 1 3 8 2 8 2 1 8 2 2 8 2 3 8 2 4 8 2 5 8 2 6 8 2 7 8 3 8 3 1 8 3 2 8 3 3 8 3 4 8 3 5 8 3 6 8 3 7 8 3 8 8 3 9 8 3 10 8 3 11 8 4 8 4 1 8 5 8 5 1 8 5 2 8 5 3 8 5 4 8 6 8 6 1 10 10 1 10 2 10 3 Security Escort Locate transmitters 174 Maintenance alarm database 174 Transmitter Change 175 Utilities me
111. Siren 500 mA solid state sink terminal switches to ground in an alarm condition e Power 12 V 1A max Transformer TR1850 Batteries 3 Amp Hour E28629B 7 Amp Hour E19729B Battery Cables C316 3 or 7 Amp C315 17 Amp C311 3 or 7 Amp expansion Compatibility EA500B ROM Version 4 00 or higher General information The alert unit is a driver for output modules such as Security Escort s E28000B horn strobe The unit should be mounted indoors however an outdoor enclosure is available The horn strobe should always be mounted outdoors The alert unit gets its main power for horn strobe activation from the 18 V AC transformer and its backup power from a battery however the multiplex bus will continue to supply the transponder information on status and troubles in the event local power is lost Mounting Normally the enclosures are mounted first and all the wiring run then the electronics are mounted wired and tested The enclosures come with their own mounting hardware The hardware kits listed above are for mounting the circuit board to the enclosures the indoor hardware kit also includes a tamper switch and a lock and key Mount the circuit board to the enclosure as indicated in the figures below deins Doe Iwao pleztic sercws hc c O t na of where to OTTEEELET AE NE Insert the etand oFs In o hese heks than stick in the inside at The s e osure Out te uf where to pza battery fonly 3 Amp Hour bettery
112. a Da oa mi o o 9 2 e e o e o o et IN m m Oo je q Oo je Ci Carrier Det No CTS Mon Power Carrier Det No CTS Mon Power T dd Im ee ee ie ee ie 8e KAT NEO o ie MOND z k m e e e o o e e Kd m ee ee ee ele ee ee ee eie A A pa A A 2 x z 5 A Fe S Ei m e 0 e o MOE OE l o OR m i m ee ie ie ie ee e o eio e mi e e OE OE OE mk m e e e e l o wale EO m k m e e e e oe lel 4 4 Figure 6 1 Transponder Comm Port Setup dialog COM The actual physical communication port over which communications to the transponder will be carried Carrier Det If checked verify that the communications port is not in use before communicating Only to be used on half duplex links where Carrier Detect indicates that the link is in use This setting is normally unchecked and rarely used No CTS If checked do not monitor the Clear to Send before communicating This setting is normally checked Mon Power If checked monitor the Ring Indicator pin to indicate a remote power supply used on this communication link has not failed This setting is normally unchecked 6 2 Remote comm port setup dialog This dialog connects the network modem and system serial ports to the physical communication ports on the computer and sets their baud rate
113. a Proxim radio is used to communicate to the Central Console If this item is checked the siren output on this transponder activates when a communications failure is detected at the Central Console If checked alarm and test reports include average levels and packet count information This extra information is for diagnostic proposes only and is not required for system operation Since the additional data increases the system traffic load leave this item unchecked This is the minimum receive level 1 to 255 a receiver must see before the green light displays acknowledging a successful test Leave this item at default 128 This is the minimum difference in receive level 1 to 255 a receiver must be less than the loudest receiver hearing a test before the green light displays acknowledging a successful test Leave this item at default 64 This is the minimum receive level 1 to 255 a receiver must see before the sounder and red light is displayed for an alarm Leave this item at default 1 This is the minimum difference in receive level 1 to 255 a receiver must be less than the loudest receiver hearing an alarm before the sounder and red light are displayed for an alarm Leave this item at default 255 These are future options leave at default 0 These are future options leave unchecked These parameters are used for engineering system load testing only Do not use in a live system as they can generate more traffi
114. act attention when there is an alarm that has been received and no operator has responded to the system yet To assign the control room output select the transponder it is connected to and its Point Number This value changes the scale that the maps are presented with It is not intended for normal operation but is typically used for testing to allow more of the map to be seen The setting may range from 30 to 400 The Enable Algorithm Tweaks checkbox must be checked for this to be displayed This setting changes the size of the yellow dot that marks the calculated location of the alarm The settings range from 19 to 76 half to double the default alarm dot size It is best to set the size of the alarm spot so that represents a diameter of 15 24 m 50 ft on the displayed map as this is the area where the transmission of the alarm most likely took place The Enable Algorithm Tweaks checkbox must be checked for this to be displayed This setting controls the involvement of receivers in the alarm location calculation only when the Linear Algorithm is being used The setting can range from O to 6 default is 2 When set to 0 only the receivers closer to the actual location of the alarm will be considered in the location calculation As the setting is raised more distant receivers will be included in the alarm calculation Typically lower settings are better than higher settings This setting should be changed if there are known p
115. ade the dialog below gives you another chance to save the changes by clicking the Yes button CAUTION Changes have been made Save changes before closing 6 4 6 Alarm area setup In the Transponder Database under the File menu select the transponder where the alarm area is to be programmed in Click the Edit Data button followed by Show areas radio button and select the desired area r Edit Transponder s Database Record P __ Transponder Data Type transponder Name TP A10 3 ID E Radio ID jo Comm Mode TCP IP IP Address Host Name n 0 123 43 111 Port No a651 l Isolate From All Other Transponders For Location l Ignore Communications Failure Trouble Type Text Trouble Tamper Text Trouble Response Text Point or Area Data Video Switcher Transponder Point Locate Number 0 Alert sl u BIE Aient2 if _ Virtual fence l Third floor Alet3 o Copy l Second floor T All above Pager Group Floor Outside Paste Location Mapl0 Cancel Figure 6 13 Transponder Area Edit Dialog 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort 6 5 Number Video Switcher Pager Group Floor Virtual Fence Area Central Console computer setup and programming en 91 Each transponder can have up to 80 areas defined in them prior to version 2 04 of the software only 40 areas could be defined This area number range from
116. ake effect This checkbox is unchecked by default Do not check this checkbox in a live Security Escort System It is for diagnostic Engineering testing only 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort ID Receiver Point Control room Point Map scale Alarm spot size Linear depth Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 117 Assign a receiver for automated transmitter exchanges The Security Escort System contains a feature where the transmitter identification number can be automatically entered into the Subscriber Database This is used for entering transmitters when first issuing them to subscribers and for transmitter exchanges This automatic capture of the transmitter identification number is accomplished by performing certain procedural steps see the Security Escort Operation Manual and then using the transmitter to make a test transmission in close proximity to a designated receiver usually located close to the Central Console By capturing the transmitter identification number in this manner keystroke errors are avoided during database entries and changes The receiver chosen for this purpose is designated as the ID Capture Receiver To assign the ID Capture Receiver its transponder name and its Point Number are selected using the boxes labeled ID Receiver and Point The Security Escort System Software can activate an output to attr
117. aling prefix Central Console computer setup and programming en 73 This computer is either the only computer in the system or on startup this computer defaults to the Master computer in a live Security Escort System On startup this computer defaults to the slave computer in a live Security Escort System This computer is used in a live Security Escort System for all operator functions It cannot control the system like the Master and Slave computers This computer is not in a live Security Escort System lt is used only for remote access For this setting to be enabled all transponder communication ports and the network port must be set to None Allows the Master computer to answer a remote access only after 10 rings If the Master does not answer the Slave answers after 12 rings Allows the Master computer to answer a remote access after the programmed number of rings If the Master does not answer the Slave will answer after the programmed number of rings plus 2 Allows the Slave computer to answer a remote access after the programmed number of rings If the Slave does not answer the Master answers after the programmed number of rings plus 2 Generally it is better to have the Master computer answer remote access calls The modem port is not connected to a modem This setting will allow a direct connection to another computer This additional computer will not display alarms but otherwise will behave like a Sl
118. an be commanded by the Central Console to transmit a test message to other nearby Receivers This Buddy Checking is performed periodically to verify that the Receivers are functioning satisfactorily Results of the Buddy Check are compared with the results of earlier Buddy Checks and any changes in a Receiver s sensitivity are reported to the Central Console where this information is stored in a system database Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 20 en System components specifications Security Escort 2 9 EA500 transponder Features Relays alarm and test signals from the Receiver to the Central Console Can support a combined total of 64 Receivers and Alert Units AC powered with battery backup for all Receivers Can provide power to SE485 Interface and or Spread Spectrum Radio Available in a large or small indoor enclosure Monitors Receivers and Alert Units 10 times per second for alarms tests tamper notification and power loss Description The Transponder is a device controller for up to 64 devices any combination of Receivers and Alert Units Its primary function is to monitor the Receivers and Alert Units and report conditions and events to the Central Console via either wire or ProxLink radios It also provides power output to certain devices Installation The Transponder can be mounted in one of two different sized enclosures It is always m
119. and pressing the lt Enter gt key This will either display a prompt or a sub menu After finishing with a sub menu press the lt Esc gt key to return to the previous menu 5 After you have finished configuring the ProxLink type lt L gt lt Enter gt then type lt Y gt to place the unit in operating mode Configuration should look as follows in Main Menu D Display ProxLink Radio Module Parameters Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 58 en System wiring Security Escort PARAMETER SETTINGS Serial ProxLink Radio to Transponders Serial Port Operating Mode Pass Through Echo Mode None Baud Rate 9600 XON XOFF Generation Disabled CTS Generation Disabled Netvork Radio Channel 6 Subchannel 1 Dest Serial 7 3659 Serial Filter 3659 Press lt E nter gt to continue Delimiters None Max Length 256 Input Time Out 1 XON XOFF Recognition Disabled DSR Generation Disabled Radio Speed 121 Kbaud Broadcast Address 1 Lost Communication Continue Type Filter Broadcast ARAMETER SETTINGS Senal ProxLink Radio to Computer Serial Port Operating Mode Pass Through Echo Mode None Baud Rate 9600 XON XOFF Generation Disabled CTS Generation Disabled Network Radio Channel 6 Subchannel 1 Dest Serial Broadcast Serial Filter None Press lt Enter to continue Figure 4 10 ProxLink Radio Module Configuration Delimi
120. and user ease of operation Our patented feature set allows for customization and integration in any installation These features ensure system integrity and the comfort that when assistance is needed help is just a click away User Self Test Assures you that your transmitter is working Battery condition sent with every transmission Each test verifies system integrity Logs each test performed for easy access and reporting Can be performed indoors and outdoors Ensures user acceptance and peace of mind Asset Tracking Location of assets Protection against removal Wireless sensing No re cabling for asset relocation Auto tracking and location identification Fixed Point Identification Allows for identification of any fixed point Simple system integration Expands over all system capability and functionality 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort System overview en 9 1 7 System components description G 4 i g gt Figure 1 1 System Block Diagram 1 Subscriber transmitter 9 Serial to Ethernet interface 2 Point tracking transmitter 10 Slave workstation 3 Personnel transmitter 11 Master workstation 4 Up to 8 workstation 12 SE485 interface 5 LAN 13 Spread spectrum wireless links 6 Up to 8 receivers 14 Alert unit 7 Up to 8 bus 15 Strobe 8 Transponder
121. ansmitter is pulled away from the belt the transmitter will immediately go into alarm 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort 2 4 System components specifications en 15 Auto tracking feature During an alarm the transmitter automatically resends the alarm signal every few seconds constantly updating the Central Console of the user s location Supervision tracking With supervision tracking enabled the transmitter will send a tracking signal to the Central Console constantly updating the user s location Testing The test mode allows a user to test their transmitter anywhere in the protected area When the user is indoors in sight of an indoor receiver or outdoors in sight of a strobe pressing the manual test button performs a test If the test is successful a small green light will flash on the indoor receiver or the strobe will flash briefly There will be no response at all if the test fails If the test fails the user should contact the Security office as soon as possible When the transmitter is tested a special low battery message is included in the transmission to Central Console if the transmitter s battery is in need of replacing Every successful test is recorded in the Subscriber Database in the Central Console software and optionally printed on the hardcopy printer The Subscriber Database contains all of the information relating to each subscriber includin
122. ansmitter should confirm the reported location or describe the actual location over the radio Either individual must record all Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 112 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units Security Escort 1 5 2 discrepancies including the actual and computed locations We recommend using a map or floor plan and drawing an arrow from the actual alarm location to the reported location It is also helpful if all successful alarm locations are marked with a P passed 4 For areas where there are alarm location problems try facing in different directions from the same spot 5 Generate additional alarms from different spots to fully understand the extent of the problem 6 You should generate alarms in areas adjacent to the area with the problem to see if they are also affected Reviewing potential problem areas Review the potential problem areas on the maps with the customer to see which areas cause them concerns and which areas they consider acceptable If the customer considers an area acceptable it is typically not worth spending additional time trying to improve the location accuracy in those areas Improving the location accuracy of an installation Once we have identified those areas that must be improved what are the options to improve the computed location accuracy Notice All changes using the following steps could potentially
123. ase If the Subscriber ID field in the file matches a record in the Subscriber Database the existing record will be merged with the corresponding record entry in the file Unmatched records will be inserted into the Subscriber Database as new records The total number of records is subject to the number of subscribers allowed for the purchased license You can find this limit in the menu About gt About If this limit is reached during the merge a pop up message appears to inform the user r Subscriber database The subscribers database has more records that this system is allowed 7 13 The Data Merge button is only visible to users or operators who are assigned the minimum security level of Install and if the file to import is named accordingly in the correct folder The file of data record entries must be placed in the Security Escort folder typically C ESCORT and named as TABMERGE DAT After preparing the TABMERGE DAT file in the Security Escort folder start the Security Escort software Go to menu File gt Subscriber Database dialog and click the Data Merge button Be patient as it may take a while and watch for the disk activity to stop If the data is merged successfully a pop up confirmation message appears It is a good idea to remove the TABMERGE DAT file to disable the merge feature the Data Merge button becomes invisible Exporting and importing the Transponder
124. ata from the Transponder Database Notice There is no way to undo the operations Therefore it is recommended to perform a database backup prior to starting the task Upon completion of the task verify the updated data before the new database is placed in service If there are problems restore the Transponder Database from the backup To import data from the import file you will need to format the data and columns according to a specific format To simplify the preparation it is recommended that you perform the export function first so that you can use the exported file as your template for your data import You will need to rename the file from TRANSMERGE EXPORT DAT to TRANSMERGE DAT accordingly Only users or operators who are assigned the minimum security level of Instal view the Transponder Database Go to menu File gt Transponder Database dialog and click the Export button is able to Notice Important The export operation does not change the existing records in Transponder Database However be mindful that every time you perform the export function clicking the Export button the operation will overwrite the TRANSMERGE_EXPORT DAT file 7 13 3 Be patient as it may take a while and watch for the disk activity to stop If the export is successful a confirmation dialog appears You will find the TRANSMERGE_EXPORT DAT file in the Security Escort folder typically C E
125. ations Records all communications to transponders This selection is only used for engineering diagnostics Leaving this item selected generates a significant amount of history and fills up the hard disk drive quickly Leave this item unchecked Reports changes in the supervision status for all transmitters that are being supervised Output all reported radio frequency communication of receiver and alert unit troubles Typically this item would be checked for devices used to monitor problems 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort 8 3 3 Transponder maps Receive level maps Database errors Transponder troubles Point troubles Login changes Network communications Modem communications Analyze alarms Master computer switch Transponder data view Printer output Popup Trouble Filter System menus and dialogs en 189 Outputs all transponder status maps This selection is only used for diagnostics Leave this item unchecked Outputs all maintenance alarm receive level maps This selection is only used for diagnostics Leave this item unchecked Outputs all reported database errors This item is checked Outputs all reported transponder troubles This item is checked for devices used to monitor problems Outputs all reported receiver and alert unit troubles This item is checked for devices used to monitor problems Reports all new system operator login a
126. ave computer If checked an answering machine is connected to this phone line If the answering machine answers a remote access call hang up and redial When another call is received within 1 min of the last ring of a previous call the Security Escort System will answer on the first ring overriding the answering machine If checked use pulse dial on all outgoing calls Otherwise tone dialing default is used Program the number of rings on which to answer If there is an answering machine on this phone line set the number of rings to at least 2 greater than the number of rings the answering machine answers Also check the Answering Machine Override checkbox On outgoing calls enter the dialing prefix if any Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 74 en Central Console computer setup and programming Password Password verify Disabled History filter output Video switcher control Remote system control Local Service Pages Local Security Pages All Local Pages Video switcher restore Modem init Modem reset Save Cancel Security Escort This is the password that is used to gain remote access to the Security Escort System If the first 5 characters of the password match the remote systems password read only access will be allowed If the first 8 characters match you will be allowed to edit databases remotely not currently implemented If all 12 characte
127. ber 0 E None Insert New Edit Data Kill Transponder Delete Point Copy Print Beginning Previous Next End of File Cancel Figure 6 4 Find Transponder s Database Dialog Bus 0 point 0 a Bus Bus Access the Transponder Database from the File menu on the main menu bar The following table describes the elements of the Find Transponder s Database Record dialog Type This field indicates the type of transponder record that you are currently viewing Currently there is only one type of transponder available Name This drop down list contains the names of the transponders Selecting the name of the transponder in the drop down list displays information of the transponder record in the dialog window The transponder names are assigned during set up and are used to indicate the physical location of the transponder or the region of the protected area covered by a particular transponder Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC en Central Console computer setup and programming Created Modified Modify Oper Radio ID Comm Mode IP Address Port No Comm Port Index Isolate From All Other Transponders For Location Security Escort The system software automatically creates these 3 fields to the right of the Find Transponder s Database Record dialog They represent the date the transponder was first entered into the Transponder Database the
128. button A grid should appear on the screen The columns of the grid represent multiplex buses from 0 to 7 left to right The rows of the grid are points on the multiplex buses from 0 to 7 bottom to top At this point there will be a zero 0 on the grid location for each receiver connected to the selected transponder A zero means that a receiver is programmed in the database and is communicating with the transponder If the number 1 appears at a point location the receiver is programmed in the database but not communicating to the transponder refer to Troubleshooting reference page 100 of this manual and locate the problem If an X appears on the grid at a point location the receiver is communicating to the transponder but is not programmed in the database Reprogram this point in the database or rotate the receiver ID rotary switch on the receiver s circuit board to the proper point number Y Alert unit is in the database but Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 94 en Central Console computer setup and programming Security Escort not responding to the system N Alert unit is in the database and is responding to the system When the transponder is communicating with all the receivers and the Receivers Database records are correct back up the database files to the hard drive if any changes were made Select the menu Utilities gt Backup and make sure it is pointed to the hard drive Click
129. c than a system can handle therefore actual alarms may be missed Leave them at default Selects the transponder the data is presented for Returns to the previous transponder in the system Advances to the next transponder in the system Sends the changes made to the selected transponder Changes are not made to the transponder EEPROM memory unless this button is clicked Reset the selected transponder to the default settings Cancel the operation and close the dialog window Transponder Data View This dialog is solely for engineering evaluation of the transponder only Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 196 en System menus and dialogs Security Escort r RAM point info RAM point stat RAM point trouble RAM EE mstat batt RAM EE buss fault RAM counters EE point info EE point stat EE point trouble Bus micro revision Last MUX message EE counters Save EE Clear EE Previous Save EE TP A10 3 Previous Figure 8 17 Transponder Data View Dialog View Transponder s Internal Data RAM point info EE point info RAM point stat EE point stat RAM point trouble EE point trouble RAM EE mstat batt Bus micro revision RAM EE buss fault Last MUX message RAM counters EE counters Clear EE Next Views the RAM image of point information Views the RAM image of point status Views the RAM image of po
130. cally populated into the New transmitter ID field FEE Find Subscriber s Database Record For Transmitter Change _ a EE 1 Home l Disabled Faculty Address Handicapped Name Jane Smith Name Jane Smith Addr Room 95 Addr 25 Long Pond Rd City State City Rochester State NY Zip Phone 2001 Zip 14640 Phonel716 564 7337 Subscriber ID 100 62 0046 Information New transmitter ID Transmitter ID 000000011 Save Cancel Figure 8 6 Save Subscriber s Database Record after Change of Transmitter ID Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 178 en System menus and dialogs Security Escort 8 2 8 2 1 Manually enter the New transmitter ID into the Transmitter ID field or use the mouse to highlight the old Transmitter ID value press and hold the lt Shift gt key and tap the lt Insert gt key Then click the Save button A prompt appears asking for a second test to confirm the change Test the new transmitter again You should see a green light on a nearby receiver and this dialog should automatically disappear from the screen confirming the change was successful Utilities menu File Logout Setup Printer Network About Backup Restore Security Preferences System Defaults System Labels Print Export System Reports Export Alarm Reports Schedules Alarm Groups Alarm Group State Current C
131. ccurred since the last backup are lost when a database is restored Therefore restore only those databases with a problem Backups should be made whenever significant changes are made to any database Notice If the Security Escort system is configured to share the database you will need to exit the Security Escort program on all slave and workstation computers The master computer will not be able to perform the restore properly as other computers are also using the files The master computer needs to have exclusive use of the database files 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort System menus and dialogs en 181 WARNING Restoring a file will overwrite all existing data and that data will be lost forever Database C Operators C Subscriber C Transponders C Reports Restore Figure 8 9 Restore Dialog a z j ts Source Master Database drive Slave Database drive Local Escort drive Cartridge disk drive Floppy A Clear entire file Select the database to be restored on the left On the right this is where the database backup is currently located Click the Restore button to replace the existing database file with the backup This process also rebuilds the database and its index tables to correct most database structure problems To abort the restore process click the Cancel button Operators Subscriber Transponders Reports
132. ce NOTE SE485 interface units are only needed if the length of the cable between the Console and the ProxLink is greater than 15 m 50 ft SE485 Interface Central Console Computer 2 Backup Console Computer 1 Primary Printer Figure 4 1 General Wiring Diagram Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 32 en System wiring Security Escort Additional Transponders s FEE a Transponder gt ER SE485 aS Twisted Pair Cable Non Shielded 24 AWG 0 6 mm To Computer 4 Conductor CAT3 CAT5 16 18 AWG 1 5 1 2 mm 2 Conductor 18 AWG 1 2 mm Li Non Shielded 4 conductor Transformer OE Green Yellow Maximum of 8 Devices per Bus Black 3000 ft 915 m Maximum wire length bed 18 AWG 1 2 mm 4 Conductor cable 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort System wiring en 33 4 2 2 Transponder information sheet Transponder Transponder Number Location Transformer for Transponder Location Breaker Panel Breaker Location Number Siren Strobe Output To Keyswitch Monitoring To Bus 0 Locations Point 0 Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Point 4 Point 5 Point 6 Point 7 Bus 1 Locations Point 0 Point 1 Point 2 Point 3
133. cense agreement carefully InstallShield Press the PAGE DOWN key to see the rest of the agreement Software License Agreement Security Escort s Central Control Software for Microsoft Windows IMPORTANT This software relates to security Access should be limited to authorized individuals This software contains provisions for setting security passwords Appropriate security levels should be established and passwords should be set before allowing operating personnel access to this software The original disk should be safeguarded against unauthorized use In addition BSS security fire controls contain passwords to prevent unauthorized access these passwords must also be set and their identity carefully Do you accept all the terms of the preceding License Agreement If you select No the setup will close To install Security Escort you must accept this agreement Figure 5 3 License Agreement Dialog Click the Yes button to accept the License Agreement The Readme Information dialog appears Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 62 en Installation options Security Escort Information Please read the following text Readme for ESC32 EXE CAUTION This version of the program needs a Software Key to operate If you don t have If this is a live system backup the databases maps and preferences before installing the sc See the Windows Network Setup for Escort document for
134. change the computed locations for all alarms at or around the changed area Therefore after any change is made the entire vicinity around the changed area must be verified Typically the first thought is to add more receivers in the problem area Generally this is a bad approach If the system was properly designed using the recommended grid layout adding extra receivers in any area of the grid will distort the response in adjacent areas and floors While it may seem to fix the problem area typically it will create more problems in adjacent areas The exception is when an area is shielded by something such as wire mesh in the walls that prevent the RF transmitted signal from passing through Therefore additional receivers may have to be added in the shielded area to ensure that all alarm transmissions will be heard Verify that the location of the receivers in the Transponder Database is accurate to their physical location and the receivers are indicated to be at the correct floor level It is also important that receivers that were physically stacked directly above one another on floors of a building are also located at the same X and Y coordinates in the database Try changing the Transponder Database location of receivers not the actual physical location one at a time while testing the alarm location response using one of the testing methods above For example if alarms are getting pulled outside a building in one area move t
135. class 3 Resident Subscriber class 4 Staf This subscriber class functions the same as the security class Subscriber class 5 Watchman This subscriber class functions the same as the Installer class Subscriber class 6 visitor Information label 1 Field Information label 2 Field2 Information label 3 Field3 Information label 4 Field4 1 Custom personal titles Sr Jr Esq MD Phd DDS I IL lll IV and V are standard Titer Title2 Tite3 Titles oo Tite5 Tite6 Tite7 Ties sve Figure 7 7 System Defaults Dialog Titles that are entered into the Subscriber Name field in the Subscriber Database are entered here The system alphabetizes the Subscriber Database entries by last name When a title is entered after the last name the entry is alphabetized incorrectly by title Entering the titles prevents this problem The labels for the four Information label in the Subscriber Database are also changeable here System Labels dialog The alarm type definitions are customized to customer s requirements in this dialog window 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 125 Edit System Alarm Type Alarm type label 1 Person threatened Alarm type label 2 Aceident person Alarm type label 3 Accident auto Alarm type label 4 Medical
136. close enough to a receiver for a help signal to be received The coverage area of the device will vary from one location to another It is important for you to know the effective range of your device The SEFD1 is designed to detect falls that meet certain criteria It may not detect every fall especially slight falls that are generally not disabling The SEFD1 Fall Detector device may also generate a fall alarm when you have not fallen For example if the device drops on the floor it may alert the monitoring center that you have fallen Operation The SEFD1 device transmits three conditions Push Button Help Button Fall Low Battery 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort 2 8 System components specifications en 19 EA102 receiver Features Receives Transmitter alarms and tests and relays the information to the Transponder Built in self testing through Buddy Check feature Indoor and outdoor security enclosures available Indoor enclosure provides confirmation of successful Transmitter test Outdoor enclosures use other type of signaling device such as a Horn Strobe Indoor Receivers provide local sounders in alarm events Description The Receivers are located throughout the protected area including building interiors Each Receiver contains a radio receiver to detect the transmissions from Transmitters anda microcomputer to decod
137. command buttons The functions of the other miscellaneous command buttons are as of below 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Locate Cut Copy Paste Central Console computer setup and programming en 89 When clicked the Edit Transponder s Database Record dialog disappears and the cursor changes to a cross hair Moving the cursor to a point on the map and clicking the left mouse button scrolls the map so the point is at the center of the screen and all previously defined receivers and areas are shown with numerical labels When the map is showing the location of the desired receiver move the cross hair to the exact location of the receiver and click the right mouse button The Edit Transponder s Database Record dialog reappears and the selected location is entered into the X and Y coordinates When the map shows the desired location move the cross hair to the exact location of the first point of the polygon that describes the boundary of the area and right click Move the cursor to the second point of the polygon and again right click The computer draws a straight line between the first and second points Repeat this process drawing all sides of the polygon to define the area To close the polygon place the last point on top of the first point The polygon can have up to nineteen sides and no two lines of the polygon may cross each other If you try to create mor
138. communicate with the paging computers The paging company assigns this value This identifies the Security Escort System when multiple Security Escort Systems report to the same service pager Keep this field as short as reasonably possible since these characters including space character will be sent before each trouble message and they are included in the Character limit set above If not desired leave blank This will present phone number to be called in response to the service page Only use if reguired since these characters plus a space will be sent before each trouble message They are included with the System name in the Character limit set above If not desired leave blank If checked demo alarms will be sent to the security pager If checked all actual alarms will be sent to the security pager If checked the confirmation pager message is not sent to the security pager when the alarm is acknowledged by an acknowledgement transmitter If checked the alarm page will be canceled if the alarm is reset before it can be communicated to the paging service If checked an alarm page will be sent a second time to the security pager Do this in case the pager was in an area where pages could not be heard when the first page was sent If checked a pager message is sent to the security person only once page till the alarm is cancelled or acknowledged Modem init This is the initialization string sent to the modem to set it up
139. communications support Commsc32 dll communications support W32mkde exe the database manager W32mkrc dll support for the database manager Wbtrcall dll Support for the database manager Wbtrv32 dll support for the database manager Lfbmp7On dll support for the screen images Lfcmp7On dll support for the screen images Ltkrn70On dll support for the screen images Ltfil7On dll support for the screen images Security Escort The following files are the preferences for this workstation and are stored in the same directory as ESC32 EXE Files Description Wprefers edb the workstation preferences settings Prefersc edb Old system preferences settings This file is converted to gprefers edb and wprefers edb and then is automatically deleted The map of the facility is a standard Windows bitmap BMP file It must be stored in the same directory as ESC32 EXE Files Description MAPO EDB Main map bitmap file MAP1 EDB Extra map bitmap file if used MAP2 EDB Extra map bitmap file if used 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Files required for Security Escort en 221 The following files are the system databases that are stored at the Master Database path duplicate copy in the Slave Database Path Files Description Operator edb System Operators Databas
140. d ProxLink Radio Module Check programming for Central Console ProxLink Radio Module to be sure it is correct If everything else checks OK replace ProxLink One transponder in communication fail on ProxLink Radio Module link Transponder 1 Check slide switch on transponder to make sure it is in the RS 232 position 2 Check DIP switch address for transponder to be sure it corresponds with Transponder Database Cable from ProxLink Radio Module to transponder Replace cable 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort 7 3 3 Symptoms Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 103 Probable Cause Possible Solutions ProxLink Radio Module 3 Check power to ProxLink Make sure radio power LED is lit 4 Check antenna connection to ProxLink Radio Module 5 Check programming for ProxLink Radio Module 6 Radio out of range or not in line of sight of central console antenna 7 Ice on antenna 8 If antenna is remote from ProxLink use RG8U cable to prevent dB loss 9 Replace ProxLink Radio Module SE485 10 Check power to ProxLink to SE485 11 Make sure slide switch on transponder is set for SE485 12 Check wiring from transponder to SE485 RX to TX RX to TX Make sure transmit goes to receive and receive goes to transmit 13 Replace SE485 Module
141. d and Password Verify Since the operator cannot see what is being entered while typing in the password field it must be entered twice to safeguard against errors password modifications are not accepted if the entries in the Password and Password Verify text boxes are not identical 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 167 Edit Operator s Database Record ME a Password io Password Verify ae Authority Level install Master Operator ID fa Name Default change this password Address Save City State Cancel Zip Phone es Figure 7 28 Edit Operator s Database Record The Operator ID field will be automatically filled in with the next available ID number there is no need to change the number selected 7 14 2 Authority levels An important consideration when creating a new operator file is the assignment of authority level The authority level determines which functions an operator can perform on the system Installing company representatives need access to almost every command in the Security Escort software the key operator for the Security department usually requires access to alter the Subscriber Operator and Report Databases while a dispatcher may only need access to view these databases Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 168
142. d contain only numeric ASCII characters Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 158 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units Security Escort Data fields in required Excel Restrictions order Column Floor Q O Basement5 1 Basement4 2 Basement3 3 Basement2 4 Basementi 5 Tunnel 6 Basement 7 Ground 8 Outside 9 Floor 1 10 Floor 2 11 Floor 3 12 Floor 4 13 Floor 5 14 Floor 6 15 Floor 7 16 Floor 8 17 Floor 9 18 Floor 10 19 Floor 11 20 Floor 12 21 Floor 13 22 Floor 14 23 Floor 15 24 Floor 16 25 Floor 17 26 Floor 18 27 Floor 19 28 Floor 20 29 Floor 21 30 Floor 22 31 Floor 23 32 Floor 24 33 Floor 25 34 Floor 26 35 Floor 27 36 Floor 28 37 Floor 29 38 Floor 30 39 Floor 31 40 Floor 32 41 Floor 33 42 Floor 34 43 Floor 35 44 Floor 36 45 Floor 37 46 Floor 38 47 Floor 39 48 Floor 40 49 Floor 41 50 Floor 42 51 Floor 43 52 Floor 44 53 Floor 45 54 Floor 46 55 Floor 47 56 Floor 48 57 Floor 49 58 Floor 50 59 Floor 51 60 Floor 52 61 Floor 53 62 Floor 54 63 Floor 55 64 Floor 56 65 Floor 57 66 Floor 58 67 Floor 59 68 Floor 60 69 Floor 61 70 Floor 62 71 Floor 63 72 Floor
143. d in service If there are problems restore the Subscriber Database from the backup Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 154 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units Security Escort Notice Important Proceeding with the import operation will delete all existing records in Subscriber Database The record entries in TABMERGE DAT are then imported to the Subscriber Database validated and sorted by the Subscriber ID The number of record entries that is imported is subject to the number of subscribers allowed for the purchased license You can find this limit in the menu About gt About If this limit is reached during the import a pop up message appears to inform the user H Subscriber database The subscribers database has more records that this system is allowed The Import button is only visible to users or operators who are assigned the minimum security level of Install and if the file to import is named accordingly in the correct folder The file of data record entries must be placed in the Security Escort folder typically C ESCORT and named as TABMERGE DAT After preparing the TABMERGE DAT file in the Security Escort folder start the Security Escort software Go to menu File gt Subscriber Database dialog and click the Import button A popup dialog appears asking for confirmation to proceed with the
144. d in the Security Escort sub directory typically C ESCORT b_audit txt This option selects the events to be sent to the system serial port 1 System serial port 1 is assigned a physical comm port in the Remote Comm Port Setup dialog and the History Filter Output field must be set in the Remote Setup dialog This option selects the events to be sent to the system serial port 2 System serial port 2 is assigned a physical comm port in the Remote Comm Port Setup dialog and the History Filter Output field must be set in the Remote Setup dialog Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 188 en System menus and dialogs Transponder restriction Alarms Points reporting alarm Tests single line Tests including point Info Transmitter low battery Operator activity log Preferences changes Database backup and restore Operator database changes Subscriber database changes Transponder data changes Spare 2 Report database changes Communications failure Transponder communication Supervision monitor RF point troubles Security Escort This option selects a transponder for the following restrictions No Restriction This selection is typically left at this setting at all times The output is not restricted by an individual transponder Only From Transponder Selected The selected events are only output if they were reported from the transponder selected in the transponder
145. d receivers Both the referenced receivers are configured in the Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 fields These are the two receivers on the same transponder that a Virtual receiver assumes the average of Both receivers must receive a signal before the Virtual receiver reports it also received a signal that is the average of the other two receivers signals The location algorithm and sensitivity adjust work the same for a Virtual receiver as for a physical receiver Enter the receiver s Point Number in the fields or click the button to select the receiver accordingly The Virtual receiver s location and sensitivity may be adjusted the same as a physical receiver After a Virtual receiver is added verify the surrounding areas to make sure they have not been adversely affected In no event should a Virtual receiver be utilized as a cost savings measure to avoid the installation of an actual receiver For explanations of Floor level Location and Map fields please refer to section Selecting receiver as the Point Type Selecting the algorithm Starting with version 2 03 of the Security Escort software there are 5 different location algorithms that can be selected on an individual receiver basis in the Transponder Database Classic original Security Escort algorithm Linear Low pull Medium pull and Strong pull By default when a receiver is set for outside or tunnel it will us
146. date of the last change of any entry for this transponder and the identity of the operator making the last change determined from the password entered to make the change This is a number assigned to the transponder at system set up It is used by the Central Console to identify the transponder during all communications between the Central Console and the transponder The number must agree with the transponder address which is set during final installation using switches on the transponder circuit board Note The number 0 is not allowed as a transponder address This is the identification number for the radio interface unit if the transponder communicates to the Central Console by means of a radio link This feature is currently not implemented This indicates which communication mode that the Central Console is using to communicate with the transponder If the Comm Mode is TCP IP this field will appear in the dialog window This field indicates the IP address assigned to the transponder If the Comm Mode is TCP IP this field will appear in the dialog window This field indicates which Central Console communications port will be used to communicate with this transponder If the Comm Mode is RS232 this field will appear in the dialog window This field indicates which Central Console communications port will be used to communicate with this transponder The Transponder Comm Port Setup dialog selects the specific
147. ddition to AC power The Alert Unit Driver contains a microprocessor that communicates with the Transponder for Strobe and Siren commands status reports and trouble indications The troubles monitored are Tamper Loss of AC Power and Low Battery Test Acknowledgment In addition to the function of attracting attention in the event of an emergency the Strobe unit is used to acknowledge a successful test of a Transmitter The Alert Unit can be configured to cause a Siren to emit a short tone and the strobe to flash for a successful Transmitter test Function During an Alarm In the event of an alarm the Alert Unit receives a signal from the Transponder and begins powering the Siren Strobe or other switched device The Siren Strobe will be active until the alarm is restored at the Central Console Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 22 en System components specifications Security Escort 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort 3 3 1 Equipment estimation location accuracy and receiver location en 23 Equipment estimation location accuracy and receiver location A Security Escort system installation consists of three major steps 1 the pre bid equipment estimation 2 the pre construction coverage verification survey and 3 the post construction setup The Security Escort receivers work effectively in a wide variety of in
148. ding fences metal walls and walls with wire mesh If a receiver is mounted on a metal fence that fence should be grounded not floating or insulated from ground and the receiver should be spaced 30 cm 1 ft from the fence and 3 m 10 ft above the ground 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Equipment estimation location accuracy and receiver location en 29 Take care that large metal objects do not shield a receiver from a protected area For example metal fences metal staircases metal buildings power transformers and metal roofs Receiver locations should be below building overhangs and eaves as these can shield the areas below them Receivers should have a clear line of sight of the protected area Therefore take care where the ground is hilly or uneven that there are no areas and low spots where several receivers can t hear the signal Transition areas between indoor and outdoor areas An outside area directly between two buildings with complete indoor protection will need no additional receivers between the buildings if they are 90 m 300 ft or less apart When protecting an outside area directly between two buildings with complete indoor protection and they are more than 90 m 300 ft apart place a row of outside receivers evenly spaced between the buildings Make sure the receiver row does not exceed the standard 90 m 300 ft spacing from the bu
149. e Pager ID This is the ID that identifies the specific pager that this message is to be sent to Many times it is the last 7 digits of the phone number that you would manually dial to access this pager The paging company assigns this value Character limit This is the maximum number of characters allowed per page Typically this is set to 80 characters The Security Escort System will truncate the pager message at this number of characters The paging company assigns this value Pages per call This is the maximum number of pager messages allowed per phone call Typically this is set to 4 pages per call When this number of messages have been sent and there are more messages to be delivered the Security Escort System will hang up and redial the paging service to deliver the remaining messages The paging company assigns this value 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Pager group Baud rate System name System phone Send installer demo alarms Send all other alarms Security Pager Confm Not Read Cancel page If alarm reset Send page a second time 2 minute delay Do not resend alarm System menus and dialogs en 207 This is the group of up to 8 pagers that this message is to be sent to You may program the individual pager as well as a group of pagers The pager group will be sent the page before the individual This is the baud rate that will be used to
150. e Preferen edb System Preferences settings Reports edb Alarm Reports database Subscrib edb Database of the Subscribers Transmitters Transpon edb Database of the System Configuration Gprefers edb Global system preferences settingss The following sound files should be in the Windows media directory Files Description SEtroubl wav trouble sound SEalarm wav alarm sound These are sample images for demo and test The following files should be in the IMAGES directory which is a sub directory to the ESC32 EXE directory default C ESCORT IMAGES Files Description Imagel jpg sample subscriber image Image2 jpg sample subscriber image Image3 jpg sample subscriber image Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 222 en Files required for Security Escort Security Escort Notes 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Files required for Security Escort en 223 Notes Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 224 en Files required for Security Escort Security Escort Notes 201
151. e OK button to turn on the Microsoft NET Framework feature Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 68 en Installation options Security Escort 5 4 2 i Ost dar hem Please wait while Windows makes changes to features This might take several minutes Figure 5 13 Change Progress Dialog Image files Map file generation and scaling The Security Escort maps are standard Windows bitmap files BMP MAPO EDB is the default map file usually the ground floor in multiple map systems The map must be saved in the Security Escort subdirectory typically C ESCORT These maps may be created from scratch using any Windows paint program however it is best to scan in an existing site map Commercial copy centers usually have scanners that can handle larger drawing sizes If an AutoCad file is available have AutoCad export a bitmap for the best looking maps that reguire the least work to make presentable If the scale of the exported map is too large or too small re export the map at the corrected scale rather than scaling the map in a graphic editor Scaling a bitmap file directly will produce a file that will require a significant amount of manual effort to make presentable Save the scanned image as a Windows bitmap file BMP with 256 colors 8 bit color High Color 16 bit or True Color 24 bit can also be used but the file sizes will be much larger and the maps will be slow
152. e Revision button If this checkbox is checked the horn output of a receiver or the siren output of an alert unit is turned on upon clicking the On button or turned off upon clicking the Off button If this checkbox is not checked the state of this output does not change If this checkbox is checked the red LED output of a receiver or the strobe output of an alert unit is turned on upon clicking the On button or turned off upon clicking the Off button If this checkbox is not checked the state of this output does not change If this checkbox is checked the green LED output of a receiver or the spare output of an alert unit is turned on upon clicking the On button or turned off upon clicking the Off button If this checkbox is not checked the state of this output does not change Upon clicking the button any checked outputs Horn Siren Green LED Red LED Strobe is turned off for the selected point on the selected transponder If the output does not change click the On button followed by the Off button again Upon clicking the button any checked outputs Horn Siren Green LED Red LED Strobe is turned on for the selected point on the selected transponder If the output does not change click the Off button followed by the On button again Normally a receiver automatically switches between its diversity antennas during normal operation leave the default selection on a working system at this setting
153. e Room Door Contact Disable shorted loop Alarm on shorted loop Optional text Contacts for Files Trouble on shorted loop Alarm when armed Trouble when disarmed on shorted loop Disable open loop Alarm on open loop Optional text Store Room Motion Detector Trouble on open loop Alarm when armed Trouble when disarmed on open loop Fixed location and pager text Storeroom 1st Floor East Wing northeast corner Send Security Immediately Transponder name Transponder Area 0 Alarm Group Not Used BEE Done l Requires Check in Figure 7 14 Subscriber Database Advanced Dialog The pager ID is required for all individual pagers dial up and local If the phone number and password are assigned the page will be sent over the modem connection If the phone number and password fields are blank the page will be routed to the local paging system If you do not desire this individual to have pager support leave the phone number password and pager ID fields all blank 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort 7 10 7 Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 135 If the pager information is entered above this individual may be assigned to 3 paging groups Each group will accept 8 members maximum Remember it takes time to communicate with a paging service therefore only add members to a group if they need to be there otherwise you
154. e Room Door Contact Disable shorted loop Alarm on shorted loop Optional text Contacts for Files Trouble on shorted loop Alarm when armed Trouble when disarmed on shorted loop KT Disable open loop Alarm on open loop Optional text Store Room Motion Detector Trouble on open loop Alarm when armed Trouble when disarmed on open loop C cy Cc Cc C ie Cc Cc Fixed location and pager text Storeroom 1st Floor East Wing northeast corner Send Security Immediately Transponder name Transponder Area 0 Alarm Group Not Used Bite Mie eis Done l Requires Check in Figure 7 15 Subscriber s Advanced Features Dialog The Edit Subscriber s Advanced Features dialog is used to set up special transmitters that monitor fixed locations subscriber pager access parameters for point transmitters the virtual fence for a wandering alarm the alarm group for arming of the transmitter and check in requirements for this transmitter Phone number This phone number is dialed to send a pager message to this subscriber Typically this is a different phone number than the one that is manually dialed to access this pager The phone number is assigned by the paging service Pager password This is the password to be sent to the paging service when a page is sent to this subscriber Leave blank if not required typically the pager password is not required The pager password is assigned by the paging service
155. e Subscriber Database it must assume that all transmitters are valid so even unauthorized not in the Subscriber Database transmitters produce audible alarm indications if the system is set for audible alarms in the Set Security Preferences dialog Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 192 en System menus and dialogs AC loss Low battery Tamper Remote key activation Remote key tamper Transponder startup Bus faults Security Escort The Central Console also attempts to reestablish communications by continually reguesting transmissions from the transponder and listening on the communications channel When communications are restored with the Central Console the transponder transmits any alarm and trouble conditions that occurred during the communications loss Control of the horns LEDs strobes and sirens reverts to the Central Console This approach to managing a communications loss assures that alarm events cannot go undetected even if the Central Console is out of operation temporarily The transponder senses when it loses AC power and reports the condition to the Central Console After a few seconds delay the Central Console displays a pop up alert and records the condition in the audit file See Transponder Current Status dialog Periodically during normal operation the transponder tests its battery If the test fails it immediately reports the condition to the Central
156. e a watch around the neck like a pendant or even mounted to a stationary location with a mounting bracket optional accessories please order separately It is ideal for use in elder care or assisted living facilities where immediate emergency notification is required Transmitting an Alarm Inthe event of an emergency the user simply presses and holds the alarm buttons to produce an alarm Transmittal will vary with different options Generally within two seconds of an alarm being generated sounders in Receivers and Strobes or Sirens connected to Alert Units will activate The alarm signal transmits to the Receivers The Receivers relay the alarm signal to the Transponder and to the Central Console The Central Console displays the user s location picture name and vital information such as a medical condition or disability Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 18 en System components specifications Security Escort 2 7 Auto Tracking Feature During an alarm the Transmitter automatically resends the alarm signal every few seconds constantly updating the Central Console of the user s location Testing The Test Mode allows a user to test his or her Transmitter anywhere in the protected area When the user is indoors in sight of an Indoor Receiver or outdoors in sight of a Strobe pressing the buttons in sequence performs a test If the test is successful a small gree
157. e and interpret the received test and alarm messages In addition the microcomputer monitors tampering and other problems and reports such conditions to the Transponder Each Receiver contains an internal self contained sounder These sounders are optionally activated if the Receiver has detected an alarm transmission Indoor Receivers are typically mounted on inside walls and are housed in small beige rectangular units Indoor Receivers have one red and one green light The green light is used to indicate a successful test of a Transmitter the red light is only illuminated during certain system tests and during alarms Outdoor Receivers are contained in small weatherproof enclosures typically mounted on the sides of buildings and on light posts Outdoor Receivers do not have the visible red and green LED s Outdoors the strobe lights connected to the Alert Units flash to acknowledge a successful test Function During an Alarm In the event of an alarm the Receivers detect an alarm signal from a Transmitter and send this information to the Transponder The Transponder forwards this information the Central Console where using the reported information from all the Receivers that detected the signal the location of the transmission is graphically displayed on the Alarm Map Buddy Check In addition to its radio receiver each Receiver also contains a transmitter functionally similar to the hand held Transmitters This transmitter c
158. e path to the slave computer s database would be SLAVE ESCORT The path on this workstation where the Security Escort was installed in Typically it is C ESCORT When backing up or restoring the databases to a disk cartridge this is the path that is used The Security Escort System software can display an image for each subscriber on the alarm screen This parameter tells the software the path where the image files are stored The default is C ESCORT IMAGES The subscriber images can be in JPEG or Windows Bitmap format All images in a system must be in the same format For the JPEG format enter the Windows extension JPG For the Bitmap format enter the Windows extension BMP When the display is set to 640x480 pixels and subscriber images are being displayed this parameter controls the image size This value can range from 10 to 100 and should be adjusted while viewing alarms to get the desired image size When the display is set to 800x600 or larger recommended this parameter has no effect Clicking this button saves the changes and closes the dialog window Clicking this button aborts the changes and closes the dialog window Network Socket Status Dialog This dialog shows diagnostic information for the selected TCP IP socket Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 214 en System menus and dialogs Current Network Socket Status Successful
159. e than nineteen sides the computer automatically closes the polygon with the nineteenth side When the polygon is closed it can be crosshatched to make it more visible After the polygon is complete double click the left mouse button to return to the Edit Transponder s Database Record dialog If the area being defined is a virtual monitor fence area for wandering alarms the monitor fence area boundary should be drawn at least 7 62 m 25 ft past the area to be protected to reduce potential false alarms This is due to the basic location accuracy of the Security Escort system If the cross hair cursor is displayed and you want to exit without changing any coordinate values press the lt Esc gt key and the Edit Transponder s Database Record dialog reappears Clicking this button copies the displayed point or area data toa clipboard and returns all values to their defaults Clicking this button copies the displayed point or area data toa clipboard Displayed values are not changed Clicking this button copies the clipboard values to the displayed point or area data The values on the clipboard are not changed and can be copied to more points or areas Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 90 en Central Console computer setup and programming Security Escort Save Clicking this button saves all changes to the database Cancel Clicking this button closes the dialog If changes were m
160. e the Linear algorithm and all other receivers will use the Low pull algorithm The receiver that hears the alarm transmission the strongest will determine the algorithm used for this alarm Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 88 en Central Console computer setup and programming Security Escort Algorithm Default Floor level Figure 6 12 Location algorithm selection Changing the algorithm setting for a receiver only affects the location when the alarm is close to this receiver and it hears the alarm the strongest The stronger the pull the more the alarm will be pulled towards the receiver with linear having no extra pull The algorithm setting will only be available if the Enable algorithm tweaks checkbox is checked in the System Preferences dialog Also starting with version 2 03 of the Security Escort software individual receiver sensitivity can be set in the Transponder Database Receivers can be adjusted from 50 to 149 of their normal sensitivity using the SA setting Adjusting the Sensitivity SA Security Escort software version 2 03 and higher allow individual receiver sensitivity to be set in the Transponder Database Receivers can be adjusted from 50 to 149 of their normal sensitivity No physical receiver changes or upgrades are required This setting should only be changed if there are known location accuracy problems in the area of this receiver Settings of 5
161. e when disarmed on open loop 138 Alarm when armed Trouble when disarmed on shorted loop 138 Alarm zone 118 130 Alarms 188 Alert 86 Alert unit estimating number of 26 Alert units to receivers 86 Algorithm 87 All from Transponder Selected 188 All Pager Confm Not Reqd 121 Ambient 198 199 Analyze alarms 189 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Answer on ring 73 answering machine 73 Answering machine override 73 Ant map 199 Antenna 198 Area definition with polygon 89 Area number 91 Arm Time 143 Arming state of this alarm group 144 Authority levels 167 Auto Advance 198 Auto Reset Comm Ports X hours 122 Auto silence alarm in X seconds 121 Auto synchronize time 211 Autobackup to the slave database 212 Automatic by schedule 144 Automatic redundancy 173 Automatically send selected troubles 206 Average 201 B Backup 180 Backup restore to disk cartridge path 213 Backup and restore 180 Backup databases 178 Bad checksum 193 Baud 72 Baud rate 207 Beginning 81 bitmap 132 BMP 132 Bring to front on alarm 116 Bring to front on trouble 116 Browse 131 Buddy check 114 Buffer Overflow 203 Buffer Overflow Count 205 Build 130 Bus 85 Bus 85 Bus fault 192 Bus micro revision 196 Byte 195 Index en 227 C Cancel 90 127 131 Cancel page if alarm reset 207 Carrier Det 70 Cartridge
162. eceive Clock In 18 Local Loopback 19 20 Data Terminal Ready 21 Remote Loopback Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 52 en System wiring Security Escort Pin Number RS 232 Signals 22 23 24 Transmit Clock Out 25 Test Mode Notice Third party user interfaces are subject to change without notice at the sole discretion of the respective providers but configuration setting shall remains as specified Follow the instructions below to set up the UDS1100 device and modify the serial cable to connect the transponder to the Ethernet network il 2 Connect UDS1100 to the Ethernet network Set up and configure the IP address of the Lantronix device There are several methods to configure the IP address Refer to the Lantronix User Guides on steps to configure the IP address Connect the Lantronix device to the Ethernet network From a computer on the Ethernet network login to the Lantronix device using the web browser interface with the default user ID and password Go to Channel 1 gt Serial Settings Configure the Protocol field as RS232 the Flow Control field as None the Baud Rate field as 9600 the Data Bits field as 8 the Parity field as None and the Stop Bits field as 1 Eten esa seers ll LANTRONIX e MAC Address 00 20 4A C1 87 31 Sit Serial Settings Network hannel 1 S
163. eckboxes Reports that are selected are printed when the Print button is clicked Reports are automatically generated every midnight for all reports that are checked in the Midnight report checkboxes Reports are automatically generated every Sunday at midnight for all reports that are checked in the Sunday report checkboxes This dialog allows the alarm reports to be exported to CSV file To export an alarm report you may directly enter the alarm date range or click the ellipsis button in From Date To Date fields and select From Time To Time from the respective drop down values An alarm report can also be generated based on the subscriber details Select the Subscriber ID Subscriber Name Transmitter ID or Subscriber Type from the drop down list to generate an alarm report only for the selected values 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort 8 2 5 8 2 6 8 2 7 8 3 System menus and dialogs en 185 r ET Hour Mins From Date 572272015 asa From Time oo oo To Date 571272015 ae To Time 23 ss m Subscriber Information Subscriber ID Subscriber Name Transmitter ID A11 Subscribers Subscriber Type eae Be Alam Time 3 ER File Name c escort almrep csv ee Export Figure 8 11 Export Alarm Report The alarm report can be sorted by Alarm Time Transmitter ID Subscriber Name
164. ect the appropriate class for this Subscriber or asset Selecting the subscriber type allows the alarm signal to be used to acknowledge alarms remotely It does not create an alarm When this transmitter transmits an alarm the alarms present on the alarm screen are acknowledged in the order they were received This is the same order the alarms would be received on a pager fora approving officer The Subscriber Type available Acknowledgement subscriber with acknowledgement transmitters Commuter normal subscriber type Faculty normal subscriber type Installer subscriber with maintenance transmitters Out of Service out of service transmitters Point type point transmitter for monitoring assets Resident normal subscriber type Security subscriber with security transmitters Staff normal subscriber type Unclassified default Visitor normal subscriber type Watchman normal subscriber type If this individual is handicapped select an item from this drop down list The condition is displayed on the alarm screen If a handicap is selected the Notes field will not show on the alarm screen There is an option to disable an individual subscriber s transmitter in such a way that it does not produce an alarm message on the Central Console This can be used to halt a subscriber s misuse of the system Disabling or enabling a subscriber is accomplished by locating the subscriber in the Subscriber Database clicking
165. ecurity Escort Transponder Transponder Number Location Transformer for Transponder Location Breaker Panel Breaker Location Number Siren Strobe Output To Keyswitch Monitoring To Bus 0 Locations Point 0 Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Point 4 Point 5 Point 6 Point 7 Bus 1 Locations Point 0 Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Point 4 Point 5 Point 6 Point 7 Bus 2 Locations Point 0 Point 1 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Point 2 Central Console computer setup and programming en 77 Point 3 Point 4 Point 5 Point 6 Point 7 Bus 3 Locations Point 0 Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Point 4 Point 5 Point 6 Point 7 Bus 4 Locations Point 0 Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Point 4 Point 5 Point 6 Point 7 Bus 5 Locations Point 0 Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Point 4 Point 5 Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 78 en Central Console computer setup and programming Point 6
166. ed Installation and operation notes The Moxa device must be powered at all times Use the included power adapter A standard male DB9 to female DB9 serial cable is used to connect the transponder to the Moxa device Instructions on setting up the Moxa device is based on the recommended model NPort 5150 firmware version 3 4 Build 11080114 The pinouts of male DB9 serial port of Moxa NPort 5150 are as follows Figure 4 8 Moxa NPort 5150 Male DB9 Pin Number RS 232 RS 422 RS 485 RS 485 4w 2W 1 DCD TXD A 2 RxD TXD B 3 TxD RXD B Data B 4 DTR RXD A Data A 5 GND GND GND 6 DSR 7 RTS 8 CTS 9 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort System wiring en 49 Notice Third party user interfaces are subject to change without notice at the sole discretion of the respective providers but configuration setting shall remains as specified Follow the instructions below to set up the NPort 5150 device and use the serial cable to connect the transponder to the Ethernet network 1 Connect NPort 5150 to the Ethernet network 2 Set up and configure the IP address of the Moxa device There are several methods to configure the IP address Please refer to the Moxa User Manual on steps to configure the IP address 3 From a computer on the Ethernet network login to the Moxa device using the web browser
167. ed The green LED will flicker if the receiver is connected to a working transponder If the green LED is not flickering verify the BUS and BUS wiring to this receiver note this is a rapid flickering There will be no data transmitted to the Central Console Therefore the Central Console will report this receiver as Not responding while the receiver is in test mode 2 Activate the transmitter from different locations near the receiver The red and green LEDs will respond to a received transmission If the receiver detected all the packets from the transmission the sounder will beep three times If the receiver detected the transmission but some of the packets were missing it will beep once This could indicate that the signal is not sufficient from this location 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 97 3 Remove the jumper P4 to return the receiver to normal operating mode 7 2 2 Transponder Status LEDs Each transponder contains LEDs that display the transponder s condition and its response to events With the exception of the AC Power LED which is located in the lower right corner of the transponder circuit board the diagnostic LEDs are located in the top right corner of the transponder board Generally the LEDs indicate the unit s status and signal system events Each LED and its function
168. een receivers for standard construction In multi floor applications the receivers on each floor must be placed directly above the receivers on the floor below this is required for proper floor to floor location For example to determine the number of receivers required to protect a building of standard construction of 60 m x 30 m 200 ft x 100 ft and four floors 1 To determine the number of receivers in each direction divide each dimension of the building by 25 m 80 ft drop the remainder and add 1 For example 60m 25 m 2 4 becomes 2 add1 3 200 ft 80 ft 2 5 becomes 2 add 1 3 30m 25 m 1 2 becomes 1 add 1 2 100 ft 80 ft 1 25 becomes 1 add 1 2 2 To determine the number of receivers required per floor multiply the number of receivers in one direction by the number of receivers in the other direction 3 x 2 6 6 receivers per floor 3 To determine the total number of receivers multiply the number of receivers per floor by the number of floors 6 x 4 24 24 receivers for the building 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Equipment estimation location accuracy and receiver location en 25 100 ft Figure 3 2 Determining the Number of Indoor Receivers Required 1 Receivers 6 Each floor would require 6 receivers resulting in a total of 24 receivers to protect this building For the best location accuracy consistent receiver
169. em wiring 4 7 4 7 1 4 7 2 4 7 3 the one that is set for the transponder in the Transponder Database of the Security Escort software NPort Web Console Windows Internet Explorer Go File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ge Favorites dy BI t gt Bl we B8 Gort web console B5 10 123 43 205 ME lt Hat X f Lantronix Device Server Operating Settings Security Escort M D wh pagr Safety Took r Port 1 Operation mode TCP Server Mode TCP alive check time ko ss min inactivity time 8000 0 65535 ms Max connection Ts ignore jammed IP No Yes allow driver control No Yes Data Packing Packing length i 0 Jo 1024 Delimiter 1 fo Hex Enable Delimiter 2 0 Heg Enable Delimiter process Do Nothing Y Processed only when Packing length is 0 Force transmit 2 oe 65535 aot EES i pees TCP Server Mode Local TCP port 10001 Command port ses http 10 123 43 205 04View htm internet fa 7 Click the Submit button to make the changes and restart the Moxa device 8 The connecting cable is a male DB9 to female DB9 serial cable Connect the male DB9 connector to the transponder and the female DB9 connector to the Moxa device Lantronix interface Introductio
170. ems with the location using the Medium Algorithm The Enable Algorithm Tweaks checckbox must be checked for this to be displayed Strong depth This setting controls the involvement of receivers in the alarm location calculation only when the Strong Algorithm is being used The setting can range from O to 6 default is 2 When set to 0 only the receivers closer to the actual location of the alarm will be considered in the location calculation As the setting is raised more distant receivers will be included in the alarm calculation Typically lower settings are better than higher settings Change this setting if there are known problems with the location using the Strong Algorithm The Enable Algorithm Tweaks checkbox must be checked for this to be displayed Alarm zone Four alarm zones allow the selection of which alarms from specific transmitters are reported on this workstation This workstation displays the alarms only for the alarm zones that are checked Each transmitter can be assigned to one or more alarm zones and when that transmitter generates an alarm if this workstation has one or more of the same alarm zones checked that alarm is displayed The system defaults to all alarms displayed on all workstations Save Save the changes and close the dialog window Cancel Cancel the changes and close the dialog window 7 7 Security Preferences dialog The Security Preferences dialog is used to make important settin
171. en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units Security Escort Edit Operator s Database Record Password z Password Verify er Authority Level Install Master v Operator ID 7 EE Alarms only View History Address View Reports View Subcribers Reset Low Battery City Edit Reports Cancel Edit Subcribers ip Insert Subcribers Delete Subscribers Maintenance View Operators Edit Operators Insert Operators Delete Records Install Install Master Figure 7 29 Edit Operator s Database Record As arule any operator should be assigned the minimum authority necessary to carry out their task The authority levels shown are in order with the highest authority shown on the bottom Each authority level has the ability to perform all of the functions of the authorities shown above it 7 15 Reports Database The Security Escort software contains a report generating feature that encourages prompt uniform reporting of incidents A sample of the alarm report dialog is shown in the figure below The system software automatically captures the alarm data displayed on the alarm screen and enters it into a report form The form also contains fields that describe the nature of the incident and the action taken These fields are to be filled in by the responding officer 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and a
172. end of line resistor Transmitting an Alarm Depending on the installed options when an alarm is generated within approximately two seconds the sounders in any nearby Receivers could be activated as well as the Strobes and Sirens connected to nearby Alert Units The alarm signal is transmitted to the Receivers which in turn relay the alarm signal to the Transponder and along to the Central Console The Central Console graphically displays the Transmitter s location along with the asset s description and a picture of the asset Also once an alarm is initiated the Transmitter commences its Auto Tracking feature Auto Tracking Feature Once an alarm has been initiated such as when the Transmitter has been moved away from the magnet the Auto Tracking feature will begin The Transmitter will send a signal back to the Central Console every few seconds updating its location for several minutes To reset the Transmitter after an alarm has been initiated all device conditions e g tamper loop magnet must be reset to normal Supervision Feature The SE3401 Point Tracking Transmitter can also be configured to transmit periodically when there is no other activity to report its status and location to the Central Console Low Battery Reporting When the Transmitter is tested a special low battery message is included in the transmission to the Central Console if the Transmitter s battery is in need of replacing These low battery alerts are log
173. er This field may be up to 16 characters This field may contain only numeric and the dash ASCII characters comma Pager Password This field may be up to 6 characters This field may contain only numeric and ALPHA ASCII characters Pager Pager ID This field may be up to 10 characters This field may contain only numeric ASCII characters Subscriber Type Handicapped Type O Unclassified 1 Commuter 2 Faculty 3 Resident 4 Security 5 Staff 6 Installer 7 Out of Service 8 Watchman 9 Visitor 10 Point type 11 Acknowledgement This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters O No handicap 1 Blind 2 Deaf 3 Handicapped 4 Wheel chair This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Transmitter ID This field may be up to 9 characters This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Away Name This field may be up to 30 characters This field may contain any printable ASCII character except the Image Filename This field may be up to 30 characters This field may contain any printable ASCII character that is valid for a file name Height Feet AA 0 7 This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Height Inches AB 0 11 This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15
174. er on the different slave and workstation computers They are typically on the master computer but they may be on a file server or any other network accessible drive Note With version 2 04 and above of the software it is possible to use UNC path names instead of mapping drive letters Therefore the path to the master computer s database would be MASTER ESCORT If this option is checked the slave computer will back up all databases in the Master Database path to the Slave Database path each night at 3 00 am 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort 8 5 2 Slave Database path Local Escort path Backup restore to disk cartridge path Subscriber image file path Extension Scaling Save Cancel System menus and dialogs en 213 The path that this master or workstation computer uses to access the hot backup database files on the slave computer This path may have a different drive letter on the different master and workstation computers They are usually on the slave computer but they may be on a file server or any other network accessible drive Typically they would not be stored on the same computer as the Master Database path so a single failure would not prevent access to both the master and slave database files Note With version 2 04 or above of the software it is possible to use UNC path names instead of mapping drive letters Therefore th
175. er to load and may require more system RAM It should be scaled so that the entire map file is at least 800 by 600 pixels covering the entire Windows screen The Security Escort software auto scrolls the map therefore it is not a problem if the map is larger than the screen The map should not be too large There should be enough area of the map on the screen when an alarm is shown so there is no question where in the facility the alarm is located from a quick review of the map A good rule of thumb is 100 pixels would represent 15 m 50 ft or greater Multiple map files For a multi story building the maps for each floor must have the same resolution Each map must be vertically aligned with all the floors above and below it Therefore the maps will have the same origin 0 0 upper left corner Typically you would do the map for the ground floor then make the maps for the other floors by editing copies of the ground floor map Where transponders from multiple systems are reporting into the same computer the map s for each system is separate and assigned unique map numbers from the other maps on that same computer The origin for the maps for each system is 0 0 upper left corner Therefore the location of the receivers in the transponder database will only consider this system s map without respect to the maps for any other systems being handled by the same computer The maps must be named MAPO EDB MAP1 EDB through MAP99 EDB Where MAP
176. er until the alarm is canceled from the screen in the normal way However these tracking updates can only occur every supervision transmission period not on an accelerated rate like a tracking alarm The Security Escort system computes the location of the transmitters when they broadcast automatic supervision transmissions periodically Because of the basic location accuracy and the floor to floor accuracy of the system there is a potential for some false alarms If false alarms are a problem check the Filter Virtual Fence checkbox in the Security Preferences dialog If you do this two successive location calculations will have to indicate the transmitter has moved outside the protected area before an alarm is generated The downside of this is a delay in the reporting of a wandering alarm of one extra transmitter supervision period This is the alarm group that controls the arm disarm status of this transmitter Select the desired alarm group from the dropdown list of the alarm group names This alarm group must be armed for this transmitter to cause an alarm which is displayed If no alarm group is assigned the transmitter is always armed When this checkbox is checked transmitter will have to be restored Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 140 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units Security Escort Requires Check in When this checkbox is checked this transmit
177. ers and alert units en 109 r Receiver Setup and Test Transponder TP A10 3 y BUS 0 point 2 2 Abort setup for this MUX point Ambient 0 Horn Siren Vv Auto Advance IV Red LED Strobe RF micro revision V Green Led Switching ie C E0 80 Cc C C Right CC0 60 Default G AOD G AO Meeting room Cancel The history display shows maps from the selected transponder Figure 7 4 Receiver Configuration Dialog Take the maintenance transmitter and go to the selected receiver The red and green light should be lit up when you arrive at the first receiver location Transmit an alarm from the maintenance transmitter The receiver should activate by blinking the red lights and sounding the sounder if the sounder jumper is in place on the receiver This will confirm that the RF portion of the receiver is working and you are at the right location The software will then turn off the LEDs on the tested receiver The receiver with the next higher point number will be automatically selected and its red and green LEDs will light Proceed to that receiver and perform the same operation with an alarm on the maintenance transmitter until the operation of all receivers has been confirmed and all receivers are working and in their proper location on that transponder If the LEDs fail to light the LED jumpers may be missing on that receiver the receiver may be set to the wrong address or you may be at the wrong location If
178. erver Disable Serial Port Serial Tunnet Port Settings Protocol RS232 X Flow Control None X Baud Rate 9600 Data Bits 8 v Parity None v Stop Bits 1 v Apply Settings Apply Defaults Pack Control E Enable Packing Idle Gap Time 12 mse o Match 2 Byte Sequence Yes No Send Frame immediate Yes No 00 00 Match Bytes a Ox 00 Send Trailing Bytes None One Two ex Flush Mode Flush Input Buffer Flush Output Buffer With Active Connect Yes No With Active Connect yes No With Passive Connect Yes No With Passive Connect yes No At Time of Disconnect Yes No At Time of Disconnect Yes No Click the OK button to apply the settings 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort T 8 System wiring en 53 Go to Channel 1 gt Connection Select TCP from the drop down list of Protocol field Enter the port number of the transponder in the Local Port field This port number is the same number as the one that is set for the transponder in the Transponder Database of the Security Escort software _ Lantronix Device Server LANTRONDC es MAC 00 1 87 31 lt a Connection Settings Network Channel 1 Server Connect Protocol list Protocol TCP Channel 1 Serial Settings EER Connect Mode Apply Settings Passive Connection Active Connection EE rd eie Acceptincoming Yes Active Connect None X Password P is
179. f they are they will have to be scaled and therefore they may loose image quality The path to the images is set in Subscriber image file path field default location of the images is C ESCORT IMAGES but they can be located anywhere found in the menu Network gt System directories and network address dialog The three character file extension of the image files is set in Extension field default is UPG Subscriber images may also be saved in Windows bitmap BMP However this format requires significantly more disk storage Only when the display is set to 640 x 480 not recommended the images are displayed on top of the map and the Scaling field 10 to 200 controls the size of the image try different settings to control the image size in the alarm screen From the menu Files gt Subscriber Database dialog select the desired subscriber then click the Edit data button The Image field is the name of file of this subscriber s image For example if the subscriber s image is stored in a file with the name Image1 jog enter Imagei in this textbox 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort 7 10 5 Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 133 You should have a minimum of a 1 MB video card memory to display the subscriber s images To get the best color displayed on your LCD monitor make sure to set it to True Color 32 bit Open Screen
180. f possible This should fill in the Transmitter ID field Then click the Find button Notice Be absolutely certain that the correct record is displayed before entering the new Transmitter ID Identification Code Changing the wrong subscriber s record makes two records ineffective the correct subscriber will be misidentified and the subscriber whose record was incorrectly altered will be disabled If possible perform a test with the subscriber s old transmitter after the change has been made the test should fail 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort System menus and dialogs en 177 E Find Subscriber s Database Record For Transmitter Change ME TN val Home l Disabled Faculty Address Handicapped Name Jane Smith Name Jane Smith Addr Room 95 Addr 25 Long Pond Rd City State City Rochester State NY Zip Phone 2001 Zip fi 4640 Phone 16 564 7337 Subscriber ID fio0 62 0046 Information NewtransmitterID Locate Key Transmitter ID 000000011 After correct subscriber is found press Change button gt gt __ Change Beginning Previous End of File Cancel Figure 8 5 Find Subscriber s Database Record When the correct subscriber s record is displayed click on the Change button and perform a test using the new transmitter The new transmitter identification code will be automati
181. f this document to install the software After the software has been installed do not run it Plug the software key into the USB port on the computer and double click the HDD32 EXE file in the Security Escort directory C ESCORT This will install the driver for the software key If the HDD32 EXE installer is not run before the Security Escort software is run the first time the Security Escort software will stop with an error and HDD32 EXE will automatically run A non network installation is complete at this point and you do not have to refer to the rest of this document Network installations The Security Escort software supports a single master computer a single slave computer optional and a maximum of eight workstations limited to the number programmed in the software key The master computer normally processes the real time communications to the transponders and controls the system The slave computer can assume the master s role by switching the transponder communications to the slave computer This system redundancy feature is explained in further details in System redundancy page 172 The workstation computers allow other computers to respond to alarms perform maintenance and edit the databases Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 60 en Installation options Security Escort 5 4 Installing the Security Escort software 5 4 1 Software installation procedure Typically the Security E
182. field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Alert Unit 2 Point This field contains the alert unit point number If this is not configured this field is 1 This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Alert Unit 3 This field contains the Transponder ID of the alert unit If this is not configured this field is O This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Alert Unit 3 Point This field contains the alert unit point number If this is not configured this field is 1 This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Alert Unit Test Alert Unit Test Point This field contains the Transponder ID of the alert unit If this is not configured this field is O This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters This field contains the alert unit point number If this is not configured this field is 1 This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Point Location Text This field may be up to 100 characters This field may contain any printable ASCII character except the Map X Position AA X position of the point on the map Default is 0 This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Map Y Position AB Y position of the point on the map Default is 0 This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Sensitivity Adjust AC 0 99 This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Bitmap
183. for pager communications Normally this setting would not have to be changed To allow changes to this string hold down the lt Shift gt lt Ctrl gt keys when this dialog is first opened This string is specific to each modem model The default setting should work with most modems Save Save the changes and close the dialog window Cancel Cancel the changes and close the dialog window 8 3 11 Send pager message dialog Allows manually entered messages to be sent to the service or security pagers Service and security pagers are configured in the Pager setup dialog Individuals and group pager assignments are configured in the Subscriber Database Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 208 en System menus and dialogs 8 4 8 4 1 Security Escort Send A Pager Text Message i Insert the text to be sent here Ed Enter pager text and select the desired individual or group Send Service Send Security Stop all pages i Pager group Send to group v Send to individual Figure 8 24 Send Pager Message Dialog Insert the text to be sent here Send Service Send Security Stop all pages Pager group Send to group Send to Individual Cancel Print history screen Enter the text to be sent to the pagers in the large text box at the top of the dialog Causes the entered message to be sent to the service pager and service pager group Causes t
184. fore a trouble displays on the computer delay screen If a restore for a trouble is received before a trouble is displayed this delay expires the trouble and the restore are ignored Tamper troubles are not delayed Transponder Parameter Change This dialog allows parameters stored in the transponder s EEPROM memory to be viewed and changed Fr Edit Transponder s EEPROM Configuration 4 re EEPROM configuration EEPROM configuration For engineering test only setup switches Do not setup values Do not change unless you know change unless you know what you are doing what you are doing Leave at default Test transmitter type Run silent Test min level Test receiver 1 Optional parameter 2 Test differential Test receiver 2 Optional parameter 3 Alarm min level Test receiver 3 Loop communications Alarm differential Test receiver 4 Enable remote key Byte 6 Transmit delay Uses Proxim radio Byte 7 Transmit point Comm fail to siren out Spare 1 0 Load delay Ha l Verbose point reports Spare 2 0 Tamper load Hl Send change Transponder TP A10 3 v Reset To Default Previous Next Cancel 7 m 7 a m Figure 8 16 Transponder Parameter Change Dialog Run silent If checked the receivers and alert units on this transponder do not sound an alarm This includes alarms received during a communications failure with the Central Console Optional parameter This option is currently disabled and reserved f
185. ftware there are five different location algorithms that can be selected on an individual receiver basis in the Transponder Database Classic original Security Escort algorithm Linear Low pull Medium pull and Strong pull By default when a receiver is set for outside or tunnel it will use the Linear algorithm and all other receivers will use the Low pull algorithm The receiver that hears the alarm transmission the strongest will determine the algorithm used for this alarm Changing the Transponder Database algorithm setting for a receiver only affects the location when the alarm is close to this receiver and it hears the alarm the strongest Change the Transponder Database algorithm setting for a receiver and test in its area using one of the testing methods above The stronger the pull the more the alarm will be pulled towards the receiver with Linear having no extra pull Verify the surrounding areas to make sure they have not been adversely affected Starting with version 2 03 and higher of the Security Escort software the five different location algorithms can individually limit how close other receivers must be to the level of the receiver hearing the alarm the best before they will be included in the alarm Classic original Security Escort algorithm Linear Low pull Medium pull and Strong pull each have a separate setting By adjusting this setting you ca
186. g Alarm group name Enter a descriptive name to identify the function of the points in this alarm group Alarm group This is the number of the alarm group 1 99 Arming state of this alarm The Off disarmed On armed and Automatic by Schedule group selection control the arming state of this alarm group Off disarmed Selecting this option disarms the alarm group The alarm group will remain off disarmed until manually changed in this dialog to On armed or Automatic by Schedule On armed Selecting this option arms the alarm group The alarm group will remain on armed until manually changed in this dialog to Off disarmed or Automatic by Schedule Automatic by schedule Selecting this option assigns the alarm group s arming state to be controlled by the indicated schedule When the schedule is active on or armed the alarm group will be armed When the schedule is off disarmed the alarm group will be disarmed Any number of alarm groups may be assigned to the same schedule First Clicking this button takes you to alarm group 1 Previous Clicking this button takes you to the next lower alarm group from the one currently displayed It will not wrap around Therefore it will be disabled at alarm group 1 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort 7 11 5 7 11 6 Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 145 Next Clicking this but
187. g a terminal emulation software package Select Start gt Programs gt Accessories gt Hyper Terminal ProxLink DB 9 to DB 25 Female RS 232 Cable 9VDC Power Supply Configure Select one of seven radio channels 902 MHz to 928 MHz Make certain that the channel chosen is the same for all the ProxLink located at the transponders and for the ProxLink at the Central Console computer Select one ProxLink for your Central Console computer The serial number located on a silver tag on the bottom of the ProxLink of this ProxLink must be entered in the Destination Serial Number and Serial Filter location on all ProxLink Radios connected to the transponders 1 Attach the PC to the ProxLink using the ProxLink RS 232 cable Attach the DB 9 Connector to the ProxLink and attach the DB 25 female connector the PC Gender changers or DB 25 to DB 9 converters may be required depending on your serial port connector type 2 Start your terminal emulation software Hyper Terminal Configure the ProxLink as follows 9600 Baud 8 Data Bits 1 Stop Bit and no parity 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort System wiring en 57 3 Put the ProxLink in User Interface Mode by pressing the CONFIGURATION button on the front of the unit The ProxLink should respond by displaying the Main Menu screen 4 Once the Main Menu is displayed configure a ProxLink parameter by selecting a menu option
188. g connectors Up to four SE485s can be included in an installation If using multiple SE485s use the connector cable provided 4 9 ProxLink setup ProxLink C312Daa Cable C312 Power Cable SE485 Interface T ProxLink wi Transponder a 0 mto15 m 0 ft to 50 ft Multiple Transponders to One ProxLink C312 Power Cable C312 Data Cable Transponder 0 m to15 m 0 ft to 50 ft ProxLink to Transponder C312 Data Cable ProxLink SE485 Interface Requires dn Backup n Power 15 m 50 ft or Greater SE485 Interface Serial Cable Transponder 15 m 50 ft or Greater ProxLink to Transponder Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 56 en System wiring ProxLink Requires Backu Pasai Sir k Data able 9 to 25 Pin n Supplied with ProxLink Central Console Computer Requires Backup Power 0 mto 15 m 0 ft to 50 ft ProxLink to Computer Security Escort N C312 Data Cable a ProxLink SE485 Interface Requires a Backup i Power 45m 50 ft or Greater SE485 Interface Serial Cable Central Console Computer Requires Backup Power 15 m 50 ft or Greater ProxLink to Computer Configuration procedure Notice For more details refer to the ProxLink Radio Module User s Manual Required equipment ProxLink Radio Module PC with RS 232 port runnin
189. g the date and time of the most recent test transmission It is possible to search the Subscriber Database for individuals who have not performed tests for a specified period of time SE3401 asset tracking transmitter Features Alerts Central Console of Transmitter s ID and location immediately on alarm Available post alarm tracking alarm map recall and more Internal antenna Two year battery life Can be mounted virtually anywhere on virtually anything Low battery indication at Central Console Includes mounting plate Description The SE3401 Point Tracking Transmitter contains a unique code which is associated with an asset at the time the Transmitter is assigned When an alarm is generated this code is sent to the Central Console which graphically displays the asset s location on a map along with a picture of the asset and any other necessary information Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 16 en System components specifications Security Escort 2 5 Installation The SE3401 can be configured to monitor magnetic or dry external contacts When mounted with an external magnet the SE3401 is mounted on the asset and the magnet is mounted on an opposite surface such as a wall When mounted with external contacts the SE3401 can be mounted anywhere on the asset and connects to the contact by two wires connected to the terminals inside the Transmitter and an
190. g transponders points receivers and alert units Security Escort Display unauthorized This checkbox determines if unauthorized alarms are to be alarms displayed on the Central Console Unauthorized alarms are those triggered by transmitters not currently registered in the Subscriber Database These could be transmitters that have been removed from the database because they were lost or stolen they could be transmitters not yet issued or they could be transmitters issued to subscribers at another Security Escort System Typically this checkbox should not be checked Sound unauthorized alarms This checkbox determines if unauthorized alarms are to be sounded on the horns of the receivers and the sirens of the alert units and transponders The option is not available unless the Display unauthorized alarms option is selected Typically this checkbox should not be checked Filter virtual fence If the virtual fence option is be used this box may be checked if some false alarms are generated to reduce the number of the false alarms If it is checked then the actual alarms will be delayed by the supervision period of the transmitter No point text if area text This checkbox affects the location text shown on the alarm screen If this checkbox is checked and the alarm is determined to be within a predefined area then only the area text will be displayed any receiver location text will be suppressed Typically this checkbox should be checked
191. ged at the Central Console RF3401 asset tracking transmitter Features Supervised Sensor Loop monitors any dry contact device Internal Reed Switch used with magnet Supervisory Signal Every 65 Minutes Complete Status including Battery and Tamper Sent with Every Transmission Compatible with all DS RF TechTM Receivers 304 MHz Factory Programmed Transmitter ID for Quick and Simple Transmitter Enrollment 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort 2 6 System components specifications en 17 Installer or user Replaceable Lithium Battery Quick Install Mounting Base Plate Included Cover Tamper Description The RF3401 Point Transmitter features a supervised sensor loop and a magnetic reed switch Use the supervised sensor loop to monitor any device with a dry contact output When used with an external magnet assembly the RF3401 reed switch allows for quick and easy installation on doors and windows SE88 panic transmitter Features Can be worn like a watch pendant or mounted to a permanent location Once activated sends immediate notification of wearer s identity and location Water resistant Description The SE88 Security Escort Watch Pendant Panic Transmitter is designed to work with the Security Escort System Once activated the wearer s identity and location is sent to the security office The SE88 may be worn lik
192. gnated floor If this checkbox is checked this area will not be used for normal alarm area location This area will only be used to define a Virtual fence Specific transmitters in the Subscriber Database can reference this transponder and area When they reference this area and the system locates the transmitter position outside the area a wandering Virtual fence alarm will be generated This alerts the operator and shows the position of the transmitter Powering up the system for the first time After the system is configured the system may be powered up If the system uses multiple transponders it is easier and more effective to power up the transponders one at a time By doing this troubleshooting time can be significantly reduced especially for transponders to determine if there is a wiring problem in the SE485 bus between transponders Notice It is very important that twisted pair wiring is used for the SE485 bus The Tx and Tx wires must be twisted together and the Rx and Rx wires must be twisted together Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 92 en Central Console computer setup and programming Security Escort Turn on the power switch on the first transponder In the Security Escort Central Console software select the menu Setup Transponder current status The following dialog window appears F vo 4 moment ii EEN Transponder TP A10 3 Succes
193. gs that govern how the Security Escort System reacts in the event of alarm and test transmissions from the subscribers transmitters This dialog is available only to the Security Director or his her key operator 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 119 r ma m Ga sa ia Figure 7 6 Security Preferences Dialog Turn on outside sounders Turn on alarm strobes Display unauthorized alarms Sound unauthorized alarms Filter virtual fence No point text if area text Output includes subscriber ID Output includes transmitter ID Limit alarms to 1 transponder Limit alarms to one area Man down Alarm On Auto track l Require alarm report M Security alarms silent M Installer alarms silent l Alarm voice output Show personal data M No receiver icons M Show tests on the map l All Pager Confm Not Reqd l Suppress Lanyard Alarm Suppress Man Down Alarm Auto silence alarm in 600 seconds Recall operator in fso seconds On outside tests flash strobe for 5 seconds Man down delay timer 5 seconds Man down jitter timer 0 seconds Auto Reset Comm Ports 0 hours Trigger all the outputs on alarm jo seconds Popup trouble box contact information Enter trouble contact information here HE 5 i l End of shift reminder Times in 24 hour format First shift reminder is Bo Second shift rem
194. gth This information is then sent to the Central Console by either wire or through ProxLink radios where it is used to graphically display the identity of the subscriber transmitting the alarm and to determine the subscriber s location 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort 2 10 System components specifications en 21 EA120 alert unit Features Provides output for alarm annunciation through the Siren Strobe or other third party switched device Provides output to Siren Strobe to indicate a successful Transmitter test Indoor and Outdoor enclosures available AC powered with battery backup Activated on command from the Central Station through the Transponder Reports tampering AC power loss backup battery power to the Transponder and output status Description An Alert Unit is a control module that communicates with the Transponder on the MUX Bus In most installations it is used to activate Siren Strobe units or other switched devices in the event of an alarm The Alert Unit also reports tampering AC power loss and backup battery level to the Transponder Installation The Alert Unit may be housed in either a metal indoor enclosure or an outdoor enclosure similar to the Outdoor Receiver enclosure depending on the application The Strobe Siren units are always mounted in outdoor locations Function The Alert Unit has backup battery power in a
195. h 3 1 2 square electrical boxes 4 4 6 Drilling templates Use the following templates for mounting the AE101 outdoor enclosure Remember to remove jumpers P1 P2 and P3 prior to installing the receiver Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 44 en System wiring Security Escort Las 1 Line up template with 2 Drill Here 1 diam max 3 4 conduit x O 2 O dy D ia a o D O ee D pt Cc O Bottom Entry 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort 4 5 4 5 1 System wiring en 45 Drilling Template for AE101 Outdoor Enclosure Rear Entry 1 Line up template with mounting holes on backside of box 2 Drill Here 1 diam max 3 4 conduit Figure 4 7 Drilling Template for AE101 Outdoor Enclosure Bottom Entry EA120B alert unit Specifications Electronics EA120B Enclosures Indoor AE1 9 H x 7 W x 1 75 D Outdoor AE101 14 75 H x 12 75 W x 3 5 D Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 46 en System wiring Security Escort 4 5 2 4 5 3 Hardware Kits Indoor H500 Outdoor H121 Temperature Range 40 F to 149 F 40 C to 65 C Power 18 V AC 50 VA Battery Backup 12 V DC Lead Acid Battery Accessory Equipment Horn Strobe E28000B e Strobe 500 mA solid state sink terminal switches to ground in an alarm condition e
196. hanges 188 Transponder data view 189 Transponder data view dialog 195 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Transponder Database 155 164 Transponder Database dialog 79 Transponder ID 80 Transponder maps 189 Transponder name 79 138 Transponder parameter change dialog 194 Transponder point number 84 Transponder restriction 188 Transponder startup 192 Transponder troubles 189 Transponder Type 79 Trigger all the outputs on alarm X seconds 122 Trouble 116 Emergency contact text box for 123 Trouble on open loop 138 Trouble on shorted loop 138 Trouble Response Text 83 Trouble Tamper Text 83 Trouble Type Text 83 Troubles 206 Turn on alarm strobes 119 Turn on outside sounders 119 U Unknown transmitters 193 Uses Proxim radio 195 Utilities menu 178 V Verbose point reports 195 Version 218 Video Switcher 91 Video switcher control 74 Video switcher restore 74 View Alarm Groups 141 View Alarm Groups dialog 143 virtual fence 89 120 Virtual fence alarm 91 138 139 Virtual Fence Area 91 Virtual receiver 87 Virtual receiver Point Type 87 Index en 235 W Wandering alarm 91 Wandering alarms 89 Watchdog minutes 123 Weekly maintenance test report 184 Weekly security test report 184 Weekly subscriber test report 184 Weekly watchman test report 184 Wiring general 30 Lantronix 50 Moxa 48 SE485 30 Wondering
197. he Security Escort software will stop with an error and HDD32 EXE will automatically run The demo installation is complete at this point and you do not have to refer to the rest of this document In demo mode communications are allowed to one transponder even if the Transponder Database has more than one transponder in it for diagnostic purposes The transponder selected in the Transponder current status or Transponder communications dialog will be the transponder that can be communicated with The transponder can be reselected at any time to change the current transponder in communication All tests supervisions and maintenance alarms will function normally however only subscriber alarms that contain reports from receivers O through 3 on bus O will function If an alarm also includes other receivers reporting that alarm will be ignored Therefore actual Security Escort operation can be demonstrated using up to 4 receivers Also a demo system can be used to directly connect to transponders using the actual transponder database from the system to perform all functions except subscriber alarms This is desirable to allow a laptop to be plugged directly into a transponder to diagnose problems In both of these modes the Subscriber Database must have five or less subscribers Non Network installations If this system is not using the network to connect master slave and workstation computers refer to the Security Escort software installation section o
198. he closest receiver in the Transponder Database to that area a little further into the building and retest If the area can be corrected using this method verify the surrounding areas to make sure they were not adversely affected It is generally better if the correction is done in small steps while verifying the adjacent areas rather than trying to correct the entire error in one step Starting with version 2 03 and higher the Security Escort software allows individual receiver sensitivity to be set in the Transponder Database Receivers can be adjusted from 50 to 149 of their normal sensitivity No physical receiver changes or upgrades are required Try changing the Transponder Database sensitivity of receivers one at a 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 113 time while testing the alarm location response using one of the testing methods above For example if alarms are being pulled towards a particular receiver lower its sensitivity in 10 increments and retest If the area can be corrected using this method verify the surrounding areas to make sure they have not been adversely affected It is generally better if the correction is done in small steps while verifying the adjacent areas rather than trying to correct the entire error in one step Starting with version 2 03 and higher of the Security Escort so
199. he device fails to respond correctly This message is generated by the transponder and sent to the Central Console whenever the transponder detects message errors in the communications between receivers and alert units Transmitter supervision monitoring group Known transmitters Unknown transmitters Monitored periods To continually monitor the status of all transmitters programmed in the database that send periodic supervision transmissions If any monitored transmitters stop sending supervision transmissions a pop up trouble is displayed To monitor for periodic supervision transmissions from transmitters not programmed in the database a pop up trouble displays if transmissions from transmitters not programmed in the database are received This is the number of supervision intervals that are consecutively missed before a pop up screen reports a specific transmitter stopped reporting supervision transmissions Communications port monitor Comm port overload Network comm failure A pop up trouble screen displays if the communications traffic to the transponders exceeds the system is capability A pop up trouble screen displays if the communications between the master and slave computers fails Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 194 en System menus and dialogs Security Escort 8 3 4 Delay to ignore troubles that auto reset Pop up trouble and pager The delay in seconds be
200. he entered message to be sent to the security pager and security pager group Causes all pages currently queued automatic or manual to be aborted and deleted Use with caution To send a page to all members of a group enter the pager group number here 1 to 99 Click this button to send the text entered to the indicated pager group Click this button to send the text entered to the individual that is selected from the drop down list Cancel and close this dialog window This selection will print the current data in the History Screen buffer to the report printer Print file dialog Enter the name of the file to be printed or click the Browse button to open the Common Open File dialog Then click the Print button to print the file to the report printer 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort System menus and dialogs en 209 rT Browse Printer Microsoft XPS Document Writer Driver winspool Port NeO0 Figure 8 25 Print File Dialog This is the standard Windows Common Open File dialog that is used for selecting the file to be printed It works the same as any other Window s standard application Date modified 5 18 2015 10 52 AM a_audit bt 5 20 2015 3 15 PM _ supervis txt 5 19 2015 6 55 PM le Tm enm Files of type Text Files TXT Cancel Figure 8 26 Common Open File Dialog 8 5 Network menu
201. heck in Status Clear screen Output verification Reset Transponder Interfaces Synchronize system time Figure 8 7 Utilities Menu Backup dialog This feature provides a convenient process for saving the information in the databases to backup files Warning To prevent the accidental loss the databases should be backed up at least once a week to multiple backups At least one of these backup copies should be kept in a different location from the central console s location Weekly backups are recommended to permit data recovery if the computer memory should become corrupted If this unlikely event occurs an operator can quickly restore the databases in question with the Restore command Backups should be made any time significant changes are made to any database 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort System menus and dialogs en 179 Notice If the Security Escort system is configured to share the database you will need to exit the Security Escort program on all slave and workstation computers The master computer will not be able to perform the backup properly as other computers are also using the files The master computer needs to have exclusive use of the database files WARNING Restoring a file will overwrite all existing data and that data will be lost forever Database Source C Operators Master Database drive C Subscriber Slave
202. hes indicating the transponder is sending the test message to the Central Console Less than a second later the Receive Data LED flashes indicating the Central Console returned an acknowledgement Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 100 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units 7 3 7 3 1 Security Escort Toggling the transponder s tamper switch on off causes the Transmit Data LED to flash indicating that the transponder is sending the tamper message to the Central Console Less than a second later the Receive Data LED flashes indicating the Central Console returns an acknowledgement Troubleshooting reference Transponder communication with SE485 bus Symptoms Probable Cause Possible Solutions All transponders on one bus in communications failure Power to SE485 Wire between SE485 and transponder incorrectly installed Check 9 V DC adapter for proper voltage Red Power LED should be ON on SE485 Check to make sure transmit from transponder goes to receive of SE485 and receive from transponder goes to transmit on SE485 RX to TX RX to TX Open short or grounded cable from SE485 to first splice or transponder Use VOM to test cable for short open or ground Repair or replace cable Also check for pair reversed Wrong cable between SE485 and computer Cable should be a straight through cable to yo
203. icons will not be shown on the alarm map display Typically this checkbox would be checked If this checkbox is checked tests from subscriber s transmitter will be displayed on the normal map screen as OK or FAIL icons signifying a successful test by a valid subscriber or an attempted test transmission from a transmitter not in the Subscriber Database This option doesn t affect the display the subscriber receives from a receiver or alert unit s strobe Typically this checkbox would be checked If this checkbox is checked the confirmation pager message is not sent to the any of the pagers when the alarm is acknowledged by an acknowledgement transmitter If this checkbox is checked the lanyard alarm is suppressed and not reported If this checkbox is checked the man down alarm is suppressed and not reported This box determines the length of time that the sirens and horns will sound before being automatically silenced by the Central Console When the sounders are automatically silenced in this way the Central Console remains in its alarm mode The numerical value is in seconds and it can be set between 0 and 9999 Typically this value would be set to prevent violating local noise ordinances and it defaults to 240 seconds 4 minutes Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 122 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units Security Escort Recall operator in X seco
204. ildings The spacing between receivers in that row should be about the same as the spacing for the receivers in the buildings Indoor receivers should be no more than 25 m 80 ft apart and outdoor receivers should be no more that 90 m 300 ft apart Both of these recommendations work well in their respective areas However if a building is adjacent to an outdoor area that building will have a greater density of receivers and therefore has a tendency to pull the computed location towards it To counteract the building tendency to pull the location consider the following special cases Ifthe outdoor area adjacent to the building is wide open and the customer is not concerned about reduced location accuracy in this area then nothing special needs to be done Follow the normal indoor and outdoor recommendations The building is near the boundary of the protected area with or without a fence at the boundary The receivers in the building should be placed at the recommended 25 m 80 ft spacing The receivers at the boundary of the protected area near the building should be spaced about the same as those in the building approximating the same grid as used in the building The building is adjacent to a large protected outdoor area that extends for more than 90 m 300 ft from the building The receivers in the building should be placed at the recommended 25 m 80 ft spacing The receivers in the large protected outdoor area should be
205. import or to abort the operation r Subscriber database This operation erase database contents Are you sure you want to continue Figure 7 24 Subscriber Database Import Confirmation Dialog Click the Yes button to continue Otherwise click the No button to abort Be patient as it may take a while and watch for the disk activity to stop If the data is imported successfully a pop up confirmation message appears It is a good idea to remove the TABMERGE DAT file to disable the import feature the Import button becomes invisible If the data is not imported successful a pop up error message appears The error message will indicate the likely issue causing the import to fail 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort 7 12 4 Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 155 Merging the Subscriber Database This section describes the information required to merge data into the Subscriber Database Notice There is no way to undo the operations Therefore it is recommended to perform a database backup prior to starting the task Upon completion of the task verify the updated data before the new database is placed in service If there are problems restore the Subscriber Database from the backup Notice Important The record entries in the TABMERGE DAT are merged with existing records in the Subscriber Datab
206. in a live system It simulates a test from the subscriber with transmitter ID number 2 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort System menus and dialogs en 217 Demo test subscriber 3 with low For demonstration only and can t be used in a live system battery Demo troubles Demo trouble restoral Demo maintenance alarm Demo maintenance test 8 6 1 About dialog It simulates a test from the subscriber with transmitter ID number 3 This test also reports low battery For demonstration only and can t be used in a live system It simulates troubles from a transponder Point troubles are simulated for AC loss tamper and no response Transponder troubles are simulated for remote key and remote key tamper The individual troubles can be enabled or disabled in the Popup Trouble Filter dialog The trouble delay in the Popup Trouble Filter dialog will also affect these troubles Therefore for demo purposes it should be set to 0 For demonstration only and can t be used in a live system It simulates trouble restorals for all the troubles sent in Demo Troubles For demonstration only and can t be used in a live system It simulates an alarm from a maintenance transmitter For demonstration only and can t be used in a live system It simulates a test from a maintenance transmitter The About dialog presents the version information copyright data and internal p
207. inder ma Bo Third shift reminder 7 Be Database find level 1A Locate test level 160 Guard tour level 192 Guard tour minutes is Watchdog minutes ho Save Sere Most of the options given are simple checkboxes To activate or deactivate the option given click on the checkbox adjacent to the text A check mark appears in the checkbox adjacent to activated option empty checkboxes signify deactivated options Some options in the Security Preferences dialog require numerical values To change the current values click the text box containing the values then type in a new value Clicking the Save button saves the modifications and exits the Security Preferences dialog Click the Cancel button to save the changes made so far to discard the changes or to remain in the Security Preferences dialog Turn Turn on outside sounders This checkbox is used to activate or deactivate the sirens on alert units and transponders Some security directors prefer that all alarms be silent others choose to employ sirens Checking this option causes the sirens on the alert units to sound in the event of an alarm Temporarily deactivating the sounders may be necessary during maintenance on alarm strobes Checking this option causes the strobe lights on the alert units and transponders to flash in the event of an alarm Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 120 en Troubleshootin
208. ing with the transponders Software overview The Central Console contains all of the operating software and all of the databases reguired by the Security Escort system The installation and maintenance portion of the Security Escort software is designed to facilitate set up and modification of the system and to provide rapid diagnosis of system problems usually with only one person being reguired The system software also continually monitors the status of each transponder to ensure it is functioning correctly Versions There are several versions of the software available The number of users the system will support defines each version The following table lists the available models and the number of supported users Model User Base SE2005 500 SE2010 1 000 SE2050 5 000 Notice For systems supporting more than 5 000 users contact Bosch Security Systems Sales Minimum system requirements As a minimum each computer in the Central Console should be equipped with the following features and components Processor 1 GHz or faster Operating system Microsoft Windows XP Windows 7 32 64 bit Windows 8 8 1 32 64 bit RAM Minimum 2 GB due to NET requirement Hard disk space 1 GB of hard disk space should be available to allow collection of historical data Backup External backup drive such as an lomega or SyQuest Cartridge Hard Disk for backup and history storage Robert B
209. int trouble Views the RAM and EEPROM images of transponder status and battery condition Views the RAM and EEPROM images of transponder MUX bus fault condition Views the RAM image of the process registers Views the EEPROM image of point information Views the EEPROM image of point status Views the EEPROM image of point trouble Views the bus micro revision for the connected points Views the last MUX bus message received Views the EEPROM image of the process registers Saves the current RAM image to the EEPROM memory on the transponder Clears the EEPROM memory on the transponder and resets the transponder Returns to the previous transponder in the system 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Next Cancel 8 3 6 Receiver configuration dialog Once the receiver and alert unit data for a transponder has been entered into the Transponder Database this dialog is used to verify that each receiver is working and is properly addressed in the database This setup tool identifies errors in the address switch settings of receivers and alert units as well as data entry errors in the Transponder Database r Receiver Setup and Test Transponder TP A10 3 BUS 0 point 0 J0 2 r Put this receiver in setup mode Ambient 0 Horn Siren M Auto Advance Red LED Strobe RF micro revision Green Led On C Switching C Left Reset point C E0
210. ions with the system serial ports ignored on the network and modem ports LF Only Appends a line feed character at the end of each string transmitted Only functions with the system serial ports ignored on the network and modem ports Remote setup dialog This dialog sets up the remote access and system serial port parameters Computer Mode System serial ports Default Master computer Port 1 C Default Slave computer Disabled C Workstation computer C History filter output Video switcher control C Remote computer Remote system control Modem access setup Local Service Pages Emergency answer only Local Security Pages C Master computer answers All Local Pages scccsssssccssss C Slave computer answers Wheelock port C Direct connect port M Answering machine override Widen Geleer Estie l Pulse dial Answer on rin a a Modem init ATEMNT QV XS0 087 120 Dialing prefix an Modem reset ATZ Password Password verify Cancel Figure 6 3 Slave and Remote Computer Access Parameters Dialog 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Default Master computer Default Slave computer Workstation computer Remote computer Emergency answer only Master computer answers Slave computer answers Direct connect port Answering machine override Pulse dial Answer on ring Di
211. is field may contain any printable ASCII character except the Open Loop Text AV This field may be up to 30 characters This field may contain any printable ASCII character except the Status Flags AW Encoded value Do not change Modify Op AX 0 30000 This field may contain only numeric ASCII characters Test Time AY Encoded 32 bit time value Do not change Last Transmitter Change AZ Encoded 32 bit time value Do not change Spare Date BA Encoded 32 bit time value Do not change Last Fail To Test Letter BB Encoded 32 bit time value Do not change Created BC Encoded 32 bit time value Do not change Modified BD Encoded 32 bit time value Do not change Low Battery BE Encoded 32 bit time value Do not change Spare2 BF This field should be blank Spare3 BG This field should be blank 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 153 7 12 2 Exporting the Subscriber Database This section describes the information required to export data from the Subscriber Database Notice There is no way to undo the operations Therefore it is recommended to perform a database backup prior to starting the task Upon completion of the task verify the updated data before the new database is placed in service If there are problems restore the Subscriber Database from the backup To import or merge data
212. is indicated below aso o Comm Fal Ji asi o o Carrie Deea i 2 as o Tarsmt ossa fi ass 0 Receve Des ii nee asi o CRO Br B E ass o 0 Ttanmwges E 5 as o Abm h Progress n as7 o Herten r ay e rer Omni E Figure 7 1 EA500 Diagnostic LEDs Comm FaliSus Fauk cerea EER EER Transm Data Receve Data CRC Eror Test h Porgess Co e Alarm in Progress 990000959 Figure 7 2 EA501 Diagnostics LEDs Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 98 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units Security Escort LED Function AC Power Lower right corner of the transponder board If this LED is off there is no AC power mains power to the board Find and correct the AC power mains power problem This LED lights even if the transponder s power switch is off Comm Fail This LED lights if the transponder is in a communications failure condition with the Central Console It automatically goes out when communications are restored Carrier Detect This LED is operational only for SE485 communications It flashes every time any transponder including this transponder on this SE485 bus sends a message to the Central Console It is used to monitor overall communications from the transponders to the Central Console If the Carrier Detect LED stays on there is a problem with one of the transponders on this bus or the wiring that must be cor
213. is the maximum number of alarms that the system processed at its busiest time If displayed in yellow more than 50 of the maximum was in use This value is the maximum number of troubles in the queue yet to be displayed If displayed in yellow more than 50 of the queue was in use This value is the maximum number of transmitters with low batteries yet to be displayed If displayed in yellow more than 50 of the queue was in use This value is the maximum number of test strobes in use at one time If displayed in yellow more than 50 of the queue was in use This value is the maximum number of transmitters timing man down events at one time If displayed in yellow more than 50 of the queue was in use This value is the current number of transmitters being monitored for supervision transmissions This value is the maximum number of bytes spooled for the printer at one time If displayed in yellow more than 50 of the queue was in use 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Max Report Spooler Bytes Max Receiver Buffer Max Transmit Buffer Hardware Overrun Buffer Overflow Count Overload Level Overload Count Reset Status Refresh Data Cancel 8 3 10 Pager setup dialog System menus and dialogs en 205 This value is the maximum number of bytes spooled for the printer for Guard Tour Reports at one time If displayed in yellow more than 50 of
214. it will cause the screen to flicker This checkbox enables and disables the buddy check feature of the system When checked the Central Console periodically issues a command via the transponders to each receiver to activate its on board transmitter The Central Console then compares the signals received from neighboring receivers to the results of earlier buddy checks thus identifying receivers which appear to have changed sensitivity Checking this checkbox causes all dates to be presented in day month year format rather than the month day year format used in North America Supervise unauthorized transmitter Checking this checkbox allows the buddy check to run as fast as it can Normally only one buddy check transmission is sent each minute 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Show maintenance levels Show test levels Enable algorithm tweaks Pager communications Monitor communications Monitor supervisions Display maintenance alarm Sound maintenance alarm Disable idle processing No buddy check delay Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 115 Checking this checkbox causes the Central Console to display the signal strength measured by each receiver as a number from 1 to 15 inside the receiver icon when maintenance alarms are displayed Otherwise the floor number is displayed Checking this checkbox causes signal stre
215. itter ID Transmitter ID Subscriber class Local phone Home phone Address line 1 Address line 2 C Subscriber ID Subscriber ID Transmitter change C Last test time Last test time C Low batt disabled Low batt disabled Write EXCEL import file pim Figure 7 10 Subscriber Print Dialog Write EXCEL import file Clicking the Write EXCEL import file button causes all the fields of all the records to be sent to the subscrib txt file in the folder in which Security Escort was installed This file may be directly imported into Microsoft Excel or any other application that accepts tab delimited text Print Clicking the Print button causes the selected data fields to print on the report printer in the indicated sort order Cancel Clicking the Cancel button aborts the print dialog and returns to the previous screen Edit Subscriber Database record When editing a subscriber s file or creating a new file the following information must be entered to complete the file subscriber name subscriber identification number and transmitter identification code The computer does not allow the edit screen to be closed until all of the mandatory fields are completed The accuracy of information in the Subscriber Database is very important in the event that a subscriber transmits an alarm the information displayed in the alarm screen is taken from this database A faulty address could hinder security s response to an alarm
216. k in schedule Both the arm time and disarm time must be programmed for every day the check ins must take place The arm time is the start of the check in schedule and it must occur before the disarm time that marks the end of the check in schedule for that day Edit Schedule Times Clicking this button displays the Edit Schedule Times dialog so the day of week arm and disarm schedule times can be edited View Alarm Groups Clicking this button displays the View Alarm Groups dialog This screen shows the alarm groups assigned to the selected schedule and their current arming state Ignore Holidays for this Each schedule can use the holiday dates as exceptions Schedule Ignore Holidays for this schedule Each schedule can use the holiday dates as exceptions Schedules are activated armed following the normal schedules if the holiday dates are configured to be ignored Otherwise the schedules are activated the entire day for the holiday dates This schedule defines the check in times Holiday dates Remove gt gt Date lt lt Add 12 25 2015 te 5 4 December 2015 gt Ignore Holiday Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su 1 2 3 45 E 7 8 9 10111213 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Figure 7 17 Holiday Selection in the Schedule Dialog Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 142 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units Security Escort Ig
217. ld be raised by 5 to allow for special coverage considerations and RF problem areas Number of transponders Assume one transponder per building for indoor installations If wiring can be run from other buildings or from outdoor receivers they may be connected to one transponder Never exceed the total number of 64 devices receivers and alert units per transponder All outside wiring must be under ground or in metal conduit Number of receivers and alert units per bus For transponders each bus can handle 8 receivers and alert units However it is a good idea to leave some addresses available on each bus to allow for future expansion For systems with a high number of supervised transmitters see Transponder wiring notes Bus wire The multiplex bus for transponder should be wired with 4 conductor 18 gauge 1 2 mm wire The wire should not be paired or shielded In the United States this is the same as fire system wire except it should not be red Number of alert units The number of alert units will be determined by each system s requirements In general enough alert units should be installed to be heard and seen from all outdoor locations of protection Remember that even in a silent system alert units can be used outside to provide test feedback Horn strobe units should be mounted in predictable locations to make them easy to identify by subscribers Alert units are not required indoors because the indoor receiver provides alar
218. lert units en 169 r Find Alarm Report Database Record i Alarm time and date Address Room 95 Acknowledge time and date 09 04 31 Fri Dec 15 2000 City State Cancelled Operator 30000 Zip Subscriber ID fi 00 62 0046 09 04 31 Fri Dec 15 2000 Phone 2001 Faculty Modified Operator 7 Record size 1673 bytes version 3 09 06 Fri Dec 15 2000 Name of OFFICER responding to the alarm Problem type Statistics Sgt Young Medical problem Description of PROBLEM Fell on Front Entrance ramp Edit Data Delete m ACTION taken Locate Key Call 911 to take her to the Hospital for X Rays Key Select Print Beginning Previous Incomplete Next End of File Cancel Figure 7 30 Find Alarm Report Database Record Eh The system software can be configured to require that a report be completed prior to the end of the shift in which the incident occurred If the Require Alarm Report option is chosen in the Edit Security Preferences dialog the report can be filled out immediately after the alarm is reset However if the report is not completed a reminder prompt appears on the screen every 5 min for 30 min before the end of the shift The time at which the prompt is to display is also set in the Edit Security Preferences dialog All of the common database commands are available in the Reports Database with the following additional commands 7 15
219. leted using the Kill Transponder button Clicking this button prints the currently displayed transponder s database record Clicking this button changes the currently displayed transponder to the first transponder in the database Clicking this button changes the currently displayed transponder to the previous transponder in the database Clicking this button changes the currently displayed transponder to the next transponder in the database Clicking this button changes the currently displayed transponder to the last transponder in the database The lower section of the Find Transponder s Database Record dialog window provides information on the devices controlled by the selected transponder record Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 82 en Central Console computer setup and programming Security Escort Two digits represent each receiver or alert unit address The first is the number of the multiplex bus on which the device is mounted 0 to 7 and the second is the multiplex point address assigned to the particular device On each of the eight multiplex busses up to 8 devices may be installed but each device must be assigned a unigue multiplex point address 0 to 7 More than one device can have a particular multiplex point address but only on different busses The multiplex point addresses are assigned by switch settings on the device receiver or alert unit circuit boards These multip
220. lex point address settings are also a part of the Transponder Database The multiplex address shown in the Transponder Database and the multiplex address set on the device circuit board must agree The Transponder Setup dialog is used to verify multiplex address settings Notice It is a good idea to create an entry in the Transponder Database for each transponder in the system before entering the data for each device so that all transponders appear in the drop down menus 6 4 3 Creating a new transponder entry Creating and modifying the Transponder Database requires special authority levels usually assigned only to the installing company s personnel Clicking the Insert New button opens a new Transponder Database dialog window The System Design Layout Sheets prepared in advance by the installation manager should contain the necessary information for assigning the Transponder Name and ID the Comm Port or Radio ID as well as the names and multiplex addresses for all receivers and alert units connected to each transponder The layout sheets will also contain the text to be used to indicate the receiver locations and will designate the alert units to be driven by each receiver 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort 6 4 4 6 4 5 Central Console computer setup and programming en 83 a Edit Transponder s Database Record 1 a r Transponder Data Type transponde
221. lly C ESCORT and named as TRANSMERGE DAT After preparing the TRANSMERGE DAT file in the Security Escort folder start the Security Escort software Go to menu File gt Transponder Database dialog and click the Import button A popup dialog appears asking for confirmation to proceed with the import or to abort the operation r Transponder database a This operation erase database contents Are you sure you want to continue Figure 7 26 Transponder Database Import Dialog Click the Yes button to continue Otherwise click the No button to abort Be patient as it may take a while and watch for the disk activity to stop If the data is imported successfully a pop up confirmation message appears If the data is not imported successful a pop up error message appears The error message will indicate the likely issue causing the import to fail Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 166 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units Security Escort 7 14 7 14 1 Operator Database The figure below is a typical screen from the Operator Database The term operator is used to refer to a person with the authority to use the various features of the Security Escort system software The term includes the Security department s dispatchers who initiate responses to alarms Security Officers who may be required to produce incident reports and other
222. m and test feedback Each transponder will drive one siren and one strobe if they are less than 15 m 50 ft from the transponder It is a good idea for each protected parking lot to have a siren strobe near it Pre construction coverage verification survey The pre construction coverage verification survey is performed after the bid is accepted and before construction begins It is done to determine the location of each receiver Each receiver location should be checked using a standard receiver in the test mode Verify each potential receiver location Using a receiver in receiver spacing mode Receiver spacing mode is enabled with jumper P5 in place jumper P4 removed ona receiver see the EA102 Receiver Installation Instructions This mode is exactly the same as the test mode except that only transmissions with an adequate receive margin are sounded This indicates the maximum acceptable spacing of receivers Use the following procedure to test the spacing of receivers 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Equipment estimation location accuracy and receiver location en 27 1 Mount the first receiver Put jumpers Pi P2 P3 and P5 in place and remove all other jumpers Power the receiver from a or 12 VDC source 3 Take the second receiver and a transmitter a distance away from the first receiver gt Activate the transmitter 5 If receiver 1 so
223. mitter is always armed For this option to be enabled the transmitter s class must be set to Point type This is the text that will be displayed as the location of the alarm for fixed location transmitters and on pagers reporting this alarm Select the transponder with the area that is defined for a wandering virtual fence alarm See Transponder Area below for the operation and setup of the wandering alarm virtual fence alarm 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Transponder Area Alarm Group Requires Restore Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 139 Wandering alarm Create a protected area by placing a virtual monitor fence around an area of the main map These areas are defined in the Transponder Database If this transmitter is constrained to remain within one of these defined areas first select the defining transponder in Transponder name above Then select the desired area from this drop down list of the transponder s area names For the wandering alarm to work the supervision period must also be programmed for this transmitter Then specific transmitters are marked in the subscriber database to be constrained within a specific fenced area defined by this option If the transmitters leave their defined area the system will report this as a Wandering alarm and continue to monitor and track the location of the transmitt
224. n The Lantronix interface is used between the RS 232 signal bus of the Security Escort transponder and the Ethernet connection of the Local Area Network LAN in order to communicate with the Security Escort Central Console Specifications Recommended UDS1100 Model Dimensions 90 mm 3 5 in x 64 mm 2 5 in x 23 mm 0 9 in Power Use the included 9 30 V DC on barrel connector Recommended Modified male DB25 to male DB9 serial cable do not use the serial cable Cable included Installation and operation notes The Lantronix device must be powered at all times Use the included power adapter 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual 100 Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort The pinouts of female DB25 serial port of Lantronix are as follows OOOOOOOOOOOOD OOOOOOOOOOOD Figure 4 9 Lantronix UDS1100 Female DB25 System wiring en 51 Do not use the female DB9 to male DB25 serial cable included A modified serial cable must be used to connect the transponder to the Lantronix device Instructions on setting up the Lantronix device is based on the recommended model UDS1100 Pin Number RS 232 Signals 1 Chassis Ground 2 Transmit Data 3 Receive Data 4 Request to Send 5 Clear to Send 6 Data Set Ready 7 Signal Ground 8 Carrier Detect 9 ges 10 ae 11 Receive Clock Out 12 on 13 14 aa 15 Transmit Clock In 16 sen 17 R
225. n Receiver spacing Receiver spacing should be no more than 24 m 80 ft between receivers for standard construction Range will be dependent upon the construction of the building For example a building with hollow drywall walls may support 24 m 80 ft spacing a building with steel reinforced concrete may require reduced spacing It is very important to maintain a consistent spacing as this will ensure optimum signal locating The more receivers that can detect a transmitted signal the more accurate the locating will be Mounting height Receivers should be mounted 1 5 to 1 8 m 5 to 6 ft from the floor Maintain a consistent mounting height to ensure optimum signal locating Do not place receivers close to the ceiling this will cause them to be closer to the floor above and therefore reduce the floor to floor location accuracy It may also be helpful to place the receivers somewhat higher only on the top floor to be covered and somewhat lower only on the bottom floor to be covered Multi floor installations Receivers must be mounted over one another in multi floor installations This helps maintain proper floor to floor reception X Receiver location insida building Select a mounting location that provides a clear line of sight of the protected area if possible Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 40 en System wiring Security Escort 4 4 3 is at least 30 m 1 ft away from metal
226. n control if distant receivers with low receive levels will be considered in the alarm calculation Starting with version 2 03 and higher of the Security Escort software you can add Virtual receivers in the Transponder Database A Virtual receiver is added at one of the 64 points allowed per transponder However there is no physical hardware used The Virtual receiver is intended to compensate in cases where there is a receiver imbalance For example if a building with a dense population of receivers is adjacent to a fence with few receivers and an alarm occurs between them the alarm location may pull towards the building The Virtual receiver references to other physical receivers that must be on the same transponder Only if both of the referenced receivers receive an alarm transmission then the Virtual receiver will be added to the alarm as if was a physical receiver that heard the alarm at the average receive level of the two reference receivers The Virtual receiver s location and sensitivity may be adjusted the same as a physical receiver After a Virtual receiver is added verify the surrounding areas to make sure they have not been adversely affected In no event should a Virtual receiver be utilized as a cost savings measure to avoid the installation of an actual receiver 7 6 System preferences dialog The System preferences dialog under the Setup menu contains a number of settings that
227. n light will flash on the indoor Receiver or the Strobe will flash briefly There will be no response at all if the test fails If the test fails the user should contact the Security Office as soon as possible Every successful test is recorded in the Subscriber Database in the Central Console Software and optionally printed on the hardcopy printer The Subscriber Database contains all of the information relating to each subscriber including the date and time of the most recent test transmission It is possible to search the Subscriber Database for individuals who have not performed tests for a specified period of time Low Battery Reporting When the Transmitter is tested a special low battery message is included in the transmission to Central Console if the Transmitter s battery is in need of replacing Also the system will not give a visual or audible response during a test indicating that the Transmitter requires service Low battery alerts are logged at the Central Console SEFD1 transmitter Calls for Help Even When You CannotCalls for Help Even When You Cannot The SEFD1 Fall Detector and Personal Help Button provides assistance that no other personal Help Button can offer The device alerts your emergency monitoring service automatically when it detects a fall even if you are unable to push the Help Button on the device The SEFD1 is designed to work in and immediately around your home or facility The device must be
228. n restoral subscriber 3 Demo test subscriber 1 Demo test subscriber 2 Demo test subscriber 3 with low battery Demo troubles Demo trouble restoral Demo maintenance alarm Demo maintenance test For demonstration only and can t be used in a live system It causes system to display an alarm from the subscriber with transmitter ID number 1 In the System Preferences dialog select Enable Demo Selections checkbox to enable these demo alarm and trouble selections The transponder communication ports and network communication ports must also be disabled and the operator of the system must login at Installer or Installer Master authority level For demonstration only and can t be used in a live system It causes system to display a lanyard alarm from the subscriber with transmitter ID number 2 For demonstration only and can t be used in a live system It causes system to display a man down alarm from the subscriber with transmitter ID number 3 The man down alarm is delayed by the programmed man down delay usually 10 seconds For demonstration only and can t be used in a live system It will restore a previous man down alarm from the subscriber with transmitter ID number 2 if it has not timed out and is not being displayed For demonstration only and can t be used in a live system It simulates a test from the subscriber with transmitter ID number 1 For demonstration only and can t be used
229. n the proper course of action The event is recorded on the hard disks of both the main and backup computers and on the printout The status of the device is recorded in the Transponder Current Status menu item under the Setup menu Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 190 en System menus and dialogs Security Escort NORTH POINT HOSPITAL 11 50 Mon May 18 2015 First verify that the cover has not been opened or removed Otherwise call the service individual in CONTACT INFORMATION below during normal business hours Enter trouble contact information here Figure 8 14 Pop Up Alert Showing Tamper Trouble This dialog allows the selection of which type of troubles that will appear in pop up messages on the console screen or be sent to the service pager The troubles described below are always recorded in the Transponder current status window but may or may not produce a pop up display or pager message depending on the selections for Popup or Pager checkboxes 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort System menus and dialogs en 191 N Select Troubles To Display As Popup Dialogs And To Print gt m transponder troubles MUX point AT receiver troubles Popup Pager Popup l AC loss L l AC loss Input 1 Low battery Low battery Input 2 l Tamper no delay MV Tamper no delay l Remote key activation No response
230. n the protected area Zip Zip code of this individual or item within the protected area Phone The phone number to access this individual within the protected area The phone number on the left side which is not the home phone is shown on the alarm screen Subscriber ID The Subscriber ID typically the Social Security Number must be typed into this field This is a required field It must be filled in with a unique ID Transmitter ID New ID The transmitter identification code can be typed into this field but a much faster and error free method is to delete any existing entry in the Transmitter ID field and then perform a test with the transmitter to be assigned to this subscriber The new Transmitter ID displays in the New ID field The new Transmitter ID must be manually entered into the Transmitter ID field or use the mouse to highlight the existing Transmitter ID and press and hold the lt Shift gt key and press the lt Insert gt key This transfers the new Transmitter ID to the correct field This is a required field it must be filled in with a unique ID Complete the change to the Subscriber information by clicking the Save button Alarm Zone Specific alarm zones are assigned to the different computer workstations of the Security Escort system Each transmitter entered in the Subscriber Database can be assigned to one or more of the alarm zones You may control on which computer workstations alarms from this transmitter appea
231. n use it to speed up its response to serial communications and other background tasks If checked the software will not register for the idle time Normally this checkbox is not checked Windows can show the amount of time each application task is taking When this checkbox is not checked it may appear that Security Escort System is hogging the processor resources This is not true because the Security Escort System is only taking the time that Windows gives it through the idle process To prove this check this checkbox The amount of time that the Security Escort System needs will drop dramatically and it will continue to operate normally same communications responses will be slowed by several hundred milliseconds If checked the software does not impose the hour between buddy checks from the same receiver Normally this checkbox is not checked and should not be checked for live systems Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 116 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units No password to exit No password on reentry No password timeout Bring to front on alarm Bring to front on trouble Control room output to siren Control room output to strobe Control room output to spare Not always top window Excel test history files Security Escort If checked the software will exit without asking for a password Normally this checkbox is not checked
232. nd logout activity Records all communications between networked computers This selection is only used for engineering diagnostics Leaving this item selected generates a significant amount of history and fills up the hard disk drive very guickly and may bog down the system during high traffic times Always leave this item unchecked Records all communications to the modem for remote Communications and pager access This selection is only used for diagnosing pager communication problems Leave this item unchecked This option outputs data allowing an engineer to evaluate how well the location algorithm is performing Leave this item unchecked Records when the master and slave computers switch roles Allows the data created by the Transponder Data View screen to be output This selection is only used for engineering diagnostics Leave this item unchecked Allows the data being sent to the printer to be sent to other outputs This item is unchecked The Security Escort System contains many built in self testing features Each transponder tests the condition of the receivers and alert units connected to it When the transponder finds a device reporting a trouble condition it communicates the problem and the device identity to the Central Console This generates a brief alert tone displays a pop up message for the operator and sends an optional pager message The message indicates the nature of the trouble and instructs the operator o
233. nder Database dialog The Bus number and Point address are also changed to reflect the selection Select point desired e Bus Number 1 3 4 5 2 MUX Point 7 gt 15 23 31 39 47 55 63 MUX Point6 gt 6 14 22 30 38 46 54 62 MUX Point5 gt 5 13 21 29 37 as 53 61 MUX Point 4 gt 4 12 20 28 36 44 52 60 MUX Point3 gt 3 11 19 27 35 43 51 59 MUX Point2 gt 2 10 18 26 34 42 50 58 MUX Point1 gt 1 9 17 25 33 ai as 57 MUX Point 0 gt 0 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 ot 2 39 6 5 l le la ls le lela la ls le le lele le la m Bus Number Alerts Only Receivers Only All Points Cancel Figure 6 6 Select Point Dialog with All Points Selected This table provides a quick way to select a particular device without having to translate between the two numbering Bus Number Point Address systems The three buttons at the bottom of this dialog allow the user to display 1 all possible device numbers AII Points button regardless that the particular transponder has a device assigned to the number 2 only locations populated by receivers Receivers Only button or only locations populated by alert units Alerts Only button 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Central Console computer setup and programming en 85 i Select point desired N Bus Number 3 4 MUX Point 7 gt MUX Poi
234. nds On outside tests flash strobe for X seconds Man down delay timer X seconds Man down jitter timer X seconds Auto Reset Comm Ports X hours Trigger all the outputs on alarm X seconds End of shift reminder First Second Third shift reminder Database find level This box determines the length of time before a recall alert is issued to the operator at the Central Console when an alarm is being displayed If neither the mouse nor any key has been actuated for the specified length of time the Central Console will trigger the alarm sound once This feature prevents inadvertently ignoring an active alarm event The numerical value is in seconds and it can be set between 0 and 240 Typically this would be set to 60 seconds The entry in this box controls the approximate length of time the strobe on an alert unit will flash to signify a successful transmitter test The value is in seconds and can be set between 0 and 15 Typically it is set to 5 seconds This value controls the time that a transmitter must be in a man down condition before a man down alarm is displayed Typically it would be set to 10 seconds Setting this value too short will cause inadvertent man down alarms to be generated This value controls the time that a transmitter will not be considering any man down alarm if man down alarm is received immediately after restore and before jitter time expire This setting will not be used
235. ng levels of all receivers on this transponder Cancel Clicking the Cancel button closes the dialog window Put this receiver in setup mode This button initiates the setup process by causing both the red and green LED of the selected receiver to light up The red and green LED will be flashing On the Central Console this button changes the Abort setup for this MUX point button to be able to proceed to the next device in the event that one receiver is not set up properly The next step is using a maintenance transmitter to transmit an alarm while standing near the receiver Notice The illuminated LED indicate to the service person standing near the device that the receiver is actually the one currently in the setup mode If the LED of the designated receiver are not illuminated there is probably an error in the switch settings of the receiver or an error in the address in the Transponder Database To help resolve such problems the person at the Central Console can command any device to illuminate its LED and or sound its horn If the receiver in the setup mode detects the maintenance alarm and if the received signal is the strongest of all receivers the horn on the receiver sounds briefly and the LEDs go off This indicates the receiver is functioning properly and the receiver s address is set correctly in the Transponder Database and on the receiver s switches Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15
236. nge to a cross hair Moving the cursor to a point on the map and clicking the left mouse button will scroll the map so that point is at the center of the screen When the map is showing the desired alarm location move the cross hair to the exact location of the alarm to be reported and click the right mouse button The dialog will reappear and the selected location will be entered into the X and Y coordinates If while the cross hair cursor is being displayed you desire to exit without changing any coordinate values press the lt Esc gt key and the transponder edit dialog will reappear Defines which bitmap is to be displayed for the fixed location of this transmitter The default map is 0 which corresponds to bitmap MAPO EDB stored in the Escort sub directory Map 1 would be MAP1 EDB There can be 100 maps per Security Escort system 0 99 If checked the reed switch input of this transmitter enabled to cause an alarm Otherwise the reed switch input will be disabled The alarm group this transmitter is assigned to must be armed for this input to cause an alarm which is displayed If no alarm group is assigned the transmitter is always armed For this option to be enabled the transmitter s class must be set to Point type This is optional text that will be added to the location text when this input reports an alarm For this option to be enabled the transmitter s class must be set to Point type If selected a
237. ngth levels to appear on the receiver icons when displaying tests on the main map screen Otherwise the green test icons are displayed Checking this checkbox causes the Map Scale Alarm Spot Size and depth settings to be displayed in this dialog It also controls the display of the SA and Algorithm settings in the Edit Transponder s Database Record dialog Normally this checkbox is not checked If checked the communications to the dial up wide area paging system through the modem will be displayed on the history screen This function is only used to diagnose communications problems to the paging system Normally this checkbox is not checked If checked the communications to the modem will be displayed on the history screen This function is only used to diagnose communications problems with the modem Monitor supervision alarms Normally when a maintenance alarm is received from a maintenance transmitter the red LED on all receivers hearing the transmission will flash for 5 seconds If this checkbox is checked the receiver with the loudest reception level will turn on both the red and green LED for 5 seconds If this checkbox is checked the receiver with the loudest reception level on a maintenance alarm will turn on its sounder for 5 seconds Normally this checkbox is not checked Normally this software registers with Windows to return to the Security Escort System if there is any idle time The Security Escort System ca
238. nore Holidays for this Schedule If the Ignore Holidays checkbox is checked for the indicated holiday dates the schedules are activated armed that entire day If the Ignore Holidays checkbox is not checked the normal action of the schedules takes place on the holiday dates Date Clicking this button displays a calendar where you can graphically select a date Remove gt gt Clicking this button removes the selected date from the Holiday dates list box lt lt Add Clicking this button adds the date shown to the Holiday dates list box 7 11 2 Edit Schedule Times dialog This dialog allows the arming and disarming times to be programmed for each of the days of the week All times are expressed in 24 hour time 00 00 to 23 59 Each schedule has one Arm Time and one Disarm Time for each of the 7 days of the week If both the Arm Time and Disarm Time are programmed to 00 00 the schedule will be active armed for the entire day If the Arm Time is 00 00 and the Disarm Time is programmed the schedule will be active armed from midnight to the programmed Disarm Time The schedule will be off disarmed from the Disarm Time to the end of the day If the Disarm Time is 00 00 and the Arm Time is programmed the schedule will be off disarmed from midnight to the programmed Arm Time The schedule will be active armed from the Arm Time to the end of the day Edit schedule arm and disarm times Ce Arm Time hh mm 00 0
239. nt 6 gt MUX Point 5 gt MUX Point 4 gt MUX Point 3 gt MUX Point 2 gt MUX Point 1 gt MUX Point 0 gt 0 2 3 4 5 Bus Number Alerts Only Receivers Only All Points Cancel Figure 6 7 Select Point Dialog with Receivers Only Selected Alternatively the Bus and Bus buttons just below the Point Number and Point Type allow the user to quickly advance the device selection by one location either one Point location or or one Bus number Bus or Bus This is useful when a task requires proceeding from device to device as during system setup or check out The button is used to display all devices to facilitate quick selection of a particular device It is most useful when diagnosing a problem with a particular device Selecting the Point Type The Point Type drop down list indicates the type of device at the location currently selected in the Point Number field Once the Point Number text box contains the proper value the device type can be selected from the Point Type drop down list Point Type None receiver Alert unit Figure 6 8 Drop Down List for Selection of Point Type The valid point types are receiver Alert unit Virtual receiver and None Select the Point Type device accordingly when there is a physical device connected at this bus location Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 8
240. ntain only numeric ASCII characters This field contains the alert unit point number If this is not configured this field is 1 This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Alert Unit Test APC This field contains the Transponder ID of the alert unit If this is not configured this field is O This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Alert Unit Test Point APD This field contains the alert unit point number If this is not configured this field is 1 This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Point Location Text APE This field may be up to 100 characters This field may contain any printable ASCII character except the Map X Position APF X position of the point on the map Default is 0 This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Map Y Position APG Y position of the point on the map Default is 0 This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Sensitivity Adjust APH 0 99 This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Bitmap Number API 0 99 This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 164 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units Security Escort 7 13 2 Exporting the Transponder Database This section describes the information required to export d
241. ntifies errors in the address switch settings of receivers and alert units as well as data entry errors in the Transponder Database To Confirm the RF Reception To confirm the RF reception LED sounder operation and location of each receiver select Receiver configuration from the Setup menu The following dialog appears F Receiver Setup and Test Transponder TP A10 3 BUS 0 point 0 J0 E a Put this receiver in setup mode Ambient 0 Horn Siren M Auto Advance Red LED Strobe on RF micro revision Green Led On C Switching C Left Reset point C E0 80 C Right C CO 60 Default Transmit Ag 40 Antenna Ambient Jamming Ant map Revision Jam map Cancel The history display shows maps from the selected transponder Figure 7 3 Receiver Configuration Dialog Select the desired transponder Click on the button next to the point number A bus and point grid will appear showing the programmed receivers Click on the lowest point number button If the first receiver is point 0 click on the 0 button or if the first receiver is point 1 click on the 1 button The point number will be automatically entered Click the Put this receiver in setup mode button The red and green LEDs will light for the selected receiver on the selected transponder 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Troubleshooting transponders points receiv
242. nu 178 Backup dialog 178 Restore dialog 180 Print Export System Reports 182 Export Alarm Reports 184 Clear Screen 185 Output verification 185 Synchronize System Time 185 Setup commands 185 Show History 186 History Filter Dialog 186 Popup Trouble Filter 189 Transponder Parameter Change 194 Transponder Data View 195 Receiver configuration dialog 197 Receiver test dialog 200 Network status dialog 202 System status dialog 204 Pager setup dialog 205 Send pager message dialog 207 Print history screen 208 Print file dialog 208 Network menu 209 System Directories and Network Address Dialog 210 Network Socket Status Dialog 213 Computer s Winsock Data Dialog 215 Computer s Name and Address Dialog 215 About menu 215 About dialog 217 Files required for Security Escort 220 Appendix Software licenses 225 Bosch software 225 Other licenses copyright notices 225 Warranties and disclaimer of warranties 225 Index 226 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort 1 2 1 3 1 4 System overview en System overview What is Security Escort Unique multiple user help call and asset tracking system Identifies user information and location by floor above or below ground Small easy to carry transmitters Indoor outdoor protection for 60 000 users and assets as well as multiple buildings Man down alarm officer tracking amp guard tour Post alarm tracking and alarm map recall S
243. o 80 Power loss alert unit 193 transponder 192 Pre construction coverage verification survey 26 Preferences changes 188 Previous 81 195 196 Print 81 126 127 184 Print file dialog 208 Print Report 145 146 Print report now 184 Print Subscriber Database 126 Print System Reports dialog 184 Print Export System Reports dialog 182 Printer 187 Printer output 189 ProxLink configuration 56 setup 56 troubleshooting 101 Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 232 en Index Security Escort Pulse dial 73 R Put this receiver in setup mode 198 199 Radio ID 80 RAM counters 196 RAM EE buss fault 196 RAM EE mstat batt 196 RAM point info 196 RAM point stat 196 RAM point trouble 196 Readme Information dialog 61 Recall operator in X seconds 122 Receive Level Maps 189 Received signal strength checkbox for displaying 115 measuring with maintenance transmitter 174 Receiver configuration 108 197 determining receiver location 26 installation 28 system power up 93 108 testing receiver spacing 26 troubleshooting 105 Receiver 1 87 Receiver 2 87 Receiver Buffer Max 203 214 Receiver configuration dialog 197 Receiver parameters 83 Receiver sensitivity adjust 88 Receiver test dialog 200 Receivers estimating number of 24 Receivers not heard from report 183 Red Led Strobe 198 Reed switch 137 Refresh Data 203 205 215 Remote comm port se
244. o located at the same X and Y coordinates in the database There are three methods that can be used to verify the location accuracy of an installed system using a standard subscriber transmitter or using a maintenance transmitter Repeat the chosen process throughout all protected areas Ask the customer for the areas where they have special concerns and devote extra attention to those areas since the customer is likely to be more critical in those areas Remember the intent of the Security Escort system is to dispatch a responding individual to an area that will not add additional delay to their response to that duress call Therefore the computed location should be considered to be in error only when it would add unacceptable additional time to the alarm response While testing it is helpful to see which receivers are involved in the alarm response and the relative reception level they reported To display the receivers select menu Utilities gt Security Preferences Make sure the No receiver icons checkbox is not checked and click the Save button Select menu Setup gt System Preferences If Show test levels and Show maintenance levels checkboxes are checked the relative reception level is shown in the receiver icons otherwise the floor number will be shown When testing with any of the following methods the transmitter must be used exactly as it would be used in normal operation A transmitter designed to be belt mounted or used ina
245. of File Figure 7 9 Find Subscriber s Database Record Statistics Data Merge Insert New Edit Data Delete Locate Key Key Select Print Cancel The information stored in a subscriber s file includes the person s name local address and phone number permanent address and phone number subscriber identification number typically the individual s Social Security number the transmitter identification code each transmitter has its own unique code which identifies the subscriber during tests and alarms and the subscriber s classification commuter resident faculty staff and so on Reset Clicking the Reset button clears the number of Total Tests count Clear Clicking the Clear button removes the Low Battery indication This should only be done after the transmitter battery is replaced or a new transmitter is issued Print Clicking the Print button displays the Subscriber Print dialog 7 10 1 Print Subscriber Database Clicking the Print button displays the Subscriber Print dialog Select one of the indicated sort orders and the data fields that you desire in the report 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort 7 10 2 Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 127 z Select Which Items Are To Be Printed For This Report Sa Subscriber database fields Sort by Print fields Name Transm
246. ollowing circumstances Master computer information is not configured in slave computer If the master computer s related information is not configured in the slave computer the slave computer will consider the master computer as unavailable As such the control of devices will switch to the slave computer automatically Master computer not reachable from slave computer If the master computer s related information is configured in the slave computer but the slave computer is unable to connect to the master computer the slave computer will keep attempting to connect for 10 consecutive times If the slave computer is still unable to connect to the master computer the control of devices will switch to the slave computer automatically Master computer not responding The slave computer will send heart beat messages to the master computer every second The master computer will acknowledge each heart beat messages to the slave computer If the slave computer did not receive 6 continuous heart beat acknowledgements from the master computer the slave computer will consider the master computer as unreachable As such the control of devices will switch to the slave computer automatically Master computer acknowledges heart beat message The slave computer will send the heart beat messages continuously Once the slave computer receives the heart beat acknowledgement from the master computer the slave computer
247. ondition is also recorded in the audit file 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort System menus and dialogs en 193 MUX bus point troubles group AC loss Low Battery Tamper No response Jamming Output device error Bad checksum The microprocessor of the alert unit detected the absence of AC power Loss of AC power affects only the strobe and siren functions of the alert unit Batteries provide backup power for the strobes and sirens The logic and communications functions derive their power from the multiplex bus The alert unit tested for a low battery condition and the test failed Whenever the cover is removed from a receiver or alert unit the on board microprocessor detects the tamper and it is reported to the transponder Tamper reports are not delayed by the pop up trouble and pager delay Whenever a receiver fails to respond to a command from the transponder a No Response message is sent by the transponder to the Central Console This can occur if a multiplex bus wire is cut or a device is damaged Each receiver monitors the level of radio energy being received at all times If the level exceeds a preset threshold for a preset length of time the on board microprocessor reports jamming The transponder generates this message when it commands a receiver or alert unit to activate or deactivate an output device siren strobe horn or LED and t
248. ontal tab character decimal 8 and the record must be terminated with a carriage return decimal 13 If a data field has no data just store the terminating tab character for that field The total number of characters in all the fields of a record must be 255 characters or less including the tab and carriage return characters Notice Area data of the transponders is not supported Only point data of the transponders is used for the export and import functionalities Data fields in required Excel Restrictions order Column Transponder ID A 1 255 This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Coordinator ID B Reserved for future use this field should contain only the numeric 0 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Data fields in required order Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 157 Excel Column Restrictions Transponder Name C This field may be up to 24 characters This field may contain any printable ASCII character except the IP Connected O RS232 1 TCP IP This field should contain only numeric ASCII characters Coordinator IP Address O Reserved for future use this field should contain only the numeric O This field is blank if IP Connected is O RS232 This field should contain a valid IP address if IP Connected is 1 TCP IP Port Number
249. opened This string is specific to each modem model The default string should work with most modems This is the reset string transmitted to the modem Normally this setting does not need to change To allow changes to this string hold down the lt Shift gt lt Ctrl gt keys when this dialog is first opened This string is specific to each modem model The default string should work with most modems Save the changes and close the dialog window Cancel the changes and close the dialog window 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Central Console computer setup and programming en 75 6 4 Transponder Database The Transponder Database is established at system set up and contains all necessary configuration data for each transponder receiver and alert unit It describes the basic structure of the installation including all device names locations types multiplex addresses etc This information is used by the Central Console to generate Alarm and Test displays on the Console and in determining which alert units are to be activated Access to the Transponder Database is from the File menu on the main menu bar The following paragraphs describe the elements of the Transponder Database dialog Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 76 en Central Console computer setup and programming 6 4 1 Transponder information sheet S
250. or future use Loop communications Normally the transponders are connected in parallel party line so they can all hear if any other transponders are in communications so they don t collide when communicating However if fiber optic communications is used between the transponders and PC they can t be connected this way Therefore they are connected in a loop The transmission from the PC goes to the receiver on the first transponder The transmission from the first transponder goes to the receiver on the second transponder and so on until the transmission from the last transponder goes to the receiver on the PC This option tells the transponders they are connected this way so it can react You must make this change to the first transponder first followed with the second continuing in order until all is done 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort 8 3 5 Enable remote key Uses Proxim radio Comm fail to siren out Verbose point reports Test min level Test differential Alarm min level Alarm differential Byte Spare Test transmitter type Test receiver 1 2 3 4 Transmit delay Transmit point Load delay Tamper load Transponder Previous Next Send change Reset to Default Cancel System menus and dialogs en 195 If checked the remote key supervised input on this transponder is enabled Otherwise it will be ignored Only check this item if
251. or open No power to receiver Check power for 10 5 V DC to 13 5 V DC If lower than 10 V or no voltage present check wiring PWR to PWR on power side of receiver repair or replace cable Defective receiver If power is present on BUS and PWR and rotary switch is set to correct address replace receiver Single receiver intermittently not responding Receiver is located past the 900 m 3000 ft maximum cable run Re engineer location or reroute cable to be under 900 m 3000 ft Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 106 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units Symptoms Probable Cause Security Escort Possible Solutions Single receiver reporting bad check sum Moisture on circuit board Seal housing where moisture is entering enclosure Replace receiver until the old one dries out Cable going to ground occasionally Replace or repair cable Insects nesting on circuit board Seal any entry point and spray insect repellent inside housing to stop any further invasions into receiver Bad splice to receiver Check all splices to make sure cables are tight and not loose causing high resistant open Defective receiver Two receivers on the bus with the same address ID number If power is present on BUS and PWR between 7 5 V DC and 10 5 V DC on bus and 10 5 V DC and
252. or troubles service and alarms security Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 206 en System menus and dialogs Security Escort Set Up Pager Access TAP or PET Pager Access Protocols W t qm Service pager Security pager l Automatically send selected troubles Send Installer demo alarms Select troubles in Popup Trouble Filter Send all other alarms Phone number Phone number ma Password Password Pager ID Pager ID Character limit so Character limit 80 Pages per call a Pages per call Ja Pager group Pager group 300 baud 1200 baud 9600 baud 300 baud C 1200 baud C 9600 baud l Cancel page if alarm reset System name ma Send page a second time 2 minute delay System phone cr CS Do not resend Alarm page Security Pager Confm Not Reqd Modem init ATEMQVX amp D2 amp 0 Save Figure 8 23 Pager Setup Dialog Automatically send If checked send the troubles selected in the Popup trouble filter selected troubles dialog to the service pager Phone number Phone number to be dialed to access the paging service This phone number is usually different from the number you would manually dial to send a page The paging company assigns this value Password This is the password that must be sent to the paging service to send the page If not required leave this field black Usually a password is not required The paging company assigns this valu
253. osch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 12 en System components specifications Security Escort 2 2 Video VGA 640 x 480 at 256 colors minimum 800 x 600 High color 16 bits recommended 1024 x 768 High color supported True color 24 bits is also supported If displaying subscriber images High color 16 bits or True color 24 bits should be used Modem Optional V 32bis 14 4 V 34 33 8 or V 90 56 6 modem for remote access and pager dial out If modem is external an additional serial port is required Sound Any Windows compatible sound system One set of computer speakers per computer Printer Parallel or network printers Additional serial ports if needed Any multi port board fully supported by Windows A four port ISA serial port card made by Digiboard model AccelePort Xe part number 76000035 Required four port cable for DB25 part number 76000008 Digiboard also makes eight and sixteen port solutions They may be contacted at www digiboard com Databases Alarm reports Each alarm is saved as a record containing subscriber data time and date of alarm acknowledgment and silence times responding officer problem description and action taken The alarm map can be reproduced and the location text is displayed History A complete chronological history of all system actions tests and alarms is recorded Operators File of those authorized to use the Security E
254. ot operational Devices will take control by themselves Notice In the event where the master computer is unavailable and the slave computer takes control of the devices alarms will be reported on the slave computer If the master computer becomes available again it will try to take control of the devices However if there are still unacknowledged alarms on the slave computer the master computer will not succeed in taking control as the alarms need to be acknowledged on the slave computer first The master computer will try to take control of the devices continuously until the unacknowledged alarms on the slave computer are acknowledged accordingly During the acknowledgement process the receiver s sounders and red LEDs may not be turned off properly You may need to turn these off manually from menu Setup gt Receiver configuration 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort 7 16 1 7 16 2 Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 173 There are 2 types of redundancy 1 Automatic redundancy system will automatically determine which computer will be the main controller based on the online availability of the master and slave computers not applicable for RS232 connections Manual redundancy manually determine which computer master or slave will be the main controller Automatic redundancy Automatic redundancy kicks in during the f
255. ot stop test n Enable Rec 1 Enable Rec 2 Enable Rec 3 Enable Rec 4 Point o Point o Point o Point o Hits 0 Hits 0 Hits 0 Hits 0 Misses 0 Misses 0 Misses 0 Misses 0 Highest o o Highest o o Highest o o Highest o o Average fo o Average o o Average o o Average o o Lowest o o Lowest o g Lowest o o Lowest o o Figure 8 20 Receiver Test Dialog Transponder Select the transponder for the transmitting point and each receiving point They can be on the same or different transponders Transmitting Point Select the point receiver on the selected transponder to generate the transmissions Total transmissions The total number of times the designated receiver transmitted the test message Missed all receivers The total number of times where the test transmission was not heard by any of the designated receivers Enable Rec This checkbox must be checked for this receiver to monitor the test transmissions Point Select the point receiver on this transponder to monitor the test transmissions Hits The number of times this receiver successfully heard the test transmission Misses The number of times this receiver failed to hear the test transmission Highest The left box displays the highest receive level at which the test transmission was heard The right box displays the greatest number of packets heard from a single test transmission Average The left box displays the average receive
256. ounted indoors The devices are connected to the Transponder by means of eight four wire Multiplex Busses two wires for power and two wires for data Each bus is capable of supporting up to eight devices A Security Escort System supports up to 255 Transponders Configuration Each Receiver and Alert Unit is identified to its Transponder by a Multiplex Address which is set during system installation using a multi position switch on the Receiver or Alert Unit circuit board Transponders communicate on the data bus with individual Multiplex devices by issuing commands which contain the Receiver or Alert Unit s Multiplex Address Setup and Testing Each Transponder and the devices connected to it are set up and can be tested remotely from the Central Console Also each Transponder reports any problems such as low battery immediately upon detecting them Function During an Alarm When a Receiver or Alert Unit detects an alarm it goes into an Off Normal state To quickly locate any devices which might be in the Off Normal state the Transponder issues global commands which are interpreted simultaneously by all of its devices approximately 10 times per second These global commands are followed by commands to specific devices to determine the nature of the Off Normal condition and in the case of an alarm or test to obtain the Transmitter Identification Number Transmitter battery condition and received signal stren
257. ove cover straighten LEDs replace cover carefully so LEDs are positioned behind viewing lens Use maintenance transmitter on test and alarm after installing cover to check visibility of LED Jumpers in OFF position on receiver Remove cover check jumpers to right of sounder above red LED and make sure jumpers P2 and P3 are ON Bad receiver After performing the steps above and LEDs still do not operate on test or alarm replace the receiver Receiver s sounder not operating Jumper in OFF position on receiver Remove the cover check jumper to right of sounder above red LED and make sure jumper P1 is ON Run Silent is turned on in the Central Console software At the Central Console select menu Setup gt Transponder Parameter dialog and un check the Run Silent checkbox Bad receiver If the sounder still does not operate after performing the steps above replace the receiver Table 7 5 EA102 receiver issues Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 108 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units Security Escort 7 4 Receiver configuration dialog Once the receiver and alert unit data for a transponder has been entered into the Transponder Database this dialog is used to verify that each receiver is working and is properly addressed in the database This setup tool ide
258. p MAPO EDB stored in the Security Escort sub directory Map 1 is MAP1 EDB There can be 100 maps per Security Escort System 0 to 99 Selecting Virtual receiver as the Point Type Use the Virtual selection when there is no physical device connected at this bus location Starting with version 2 03 of the Security Escort software you can add Virtual receivers in the Transponder Database A Virtual receiver is added at one of the 64 points allowed per transponder However there is no physical hardware used Point or Area Data Point Type Locate Number S Virtual Receiver 1 Bus 0 point 5 a E Bus Bus Receiver 2 rl Algorithm Default Copy Floor level Basement5 Paste Location saso Save Mapl0 Cancel Figure 6 11 Data Entry after Selection of Virtual Receiver Point Type i ieg The Virtual receiver is intended to compensate in cases where there is a receiver imbalance For example if a building with a dense population of receivers is adjacent to a fence with few receivers and an alarm occurs between them the alarm location may pull towards the building The Virtual receiver references two other physical receivers that must be on the same transponder Only if both of the referenced receivers receive an alarm transmission then the Virtual receiver will be added to the alarm as if was a physical receiver that heard the alarm at the average receive level of the 2 reference
259. p to 30 characters This field may contain any printable ASCII character except the Away Address 2 This field may be up to 30 characters This field may contain any printable ASCII character except the Away City This field may be up to 20 characters This field may contain any printable ASCII character except the Away State This field may be up to 3 characters This field may contain only ALPHA ASCII characters Away Zip This field may be up to 10 characters This field may contain only ALPHA numeric and the dash ASCII characters 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Data fields in required order Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en Excel Column 149 Restrictions Supplemental Text Field 1 O This field may be up to 254 characters This field may contain any printable ASCII character except the Supplemental Text Field 2 This field may be up to 254 characters This field may contain any printable ASCII character except the Supplemental Text Field 3 This field may be up to 254 characters This field may contain any printable ASCII character except the Supplemental Text Field 4 This field may be up to 254 characters This field may contain any printable ASCII character except the Pager Phone Numb
260. physical port that this index will refer to When checked this transponder is isolated from all other transponders for location considerations This should be used when distant transponders sometimes hear an alarm and throw off the alarm location calculation If this checkbox is checked it indicates that this transponder is protecting an area that is independent of all other transponders in the system When an alarm is reported and receivers on this transponder have the best reception only the receivers on this transponder will be considered for the location of this alarm If another transponder has the best reception then the receivers on this transponder will be ignored for the location of this alarm 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Ignore Communications Failure Insert New Edit Data Kill Transponder Delete Point Copy Print Beginning Previous Next End of File MUX Point Data Central Console computer setup and programming en 81 This checkbox allows communications failures to be ignored for this transponder It is used during a new installation for transponders that are not yet fully on line During system maintenance when a transponder is out of service for a while it is used so that the communications failure messages will not flash on the screen and distract the operator Checking this checkbox causes the system to igno
261. points receivers and alert units Security Escort 7 12 r Subscriber Failed to Check in F Subscribers that failed to check in Schedule No Name sd Address m Print Report Acknowledge Figure 7 22 Current Check in Status Dialog Print Report Clicking this button prints the displayed data to the report printer Acknowledge Clicking this button closes the dialog if it was selected from the menu However if the dialog appeared automatically at the end of the check in period because some subscribers failed to check in you must enter your password to acknowledge the dialog and remove it from this computer s and all other computer workstations screens Exporting importing and merging the Subscriber Database The following sections describe the steps to export import and merge data from and into the Subscriber Database The file formats for the tasks are included in detail 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort 7 12 1 Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 147 E Find Subscriber s Transmitter Type transmitter Subscriber Type Security Disabili No handica ee k Supervision Duration Em Seconds M Disabled F Silent Home Name Sgt John Young Name sot John Young Addr Security Department Addr 1 Oak St City State City Rochester State NY Zip Phone 191
262. r Alarm Background Color Select the desired background color to display for alarm when this transmitter is activated Female Male These characteristics are shown on the alarm screen Height Build Hair color Eye color 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Image Browse Advanced Information Save Cancel Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 131 Enter the filename for the image of this individual or item to be shown on the alarm screen Click the Browse button to open a dialog box to select the filename from a list of available files Used to set up special transmitters that monitor fixed locations These features are not used for personal transmitters This button is available only to the maintenance and installation personnel see the Security Escort Technical Reference Manual The Information button is used to enter specific information about the holder of this transmitter Clicking the Save button saves all changes to the database Clicking the Cancel button allows you to abort and cancel all changes to the database A confirmation dialog box appears asking for confirmation to save changes before closing Click the Yes button to save the changes No button to abort the changes or Cancel button to return to the Edit Subscriber dialog 7 10 3 Additional subscriber information The Information button is
263. r Name ID Radio ID fo Comm Mode RS232 Comm Port Index A l Isolate From All Other Transponders For Location l Ignore Communications Failure Trouble Type Text Trouble Tamper Text Trouble Response Text Show points C Show areas a Point or rea Data Point Type Number fo 2 None gt Bus 0 point 0 Bus Bus Figure 6 5 Blank Dialog Resulting from Selection of Insert New Button The new elements of the Edit Transponder s Database Record dialog Trouble Type Text This is the text that will be shown in the trouble dialog when the remote key input on the transponder goes active shorted Trouble Tamper Text This is the text that will be shown in the trouble dialog when the remote key input on the transponder goes into trouble open Trouble Response This is the text that will be shown in the trouble dialog as the Text response test The actions the responding individual should take Show Points If selected the lower section of the Transponder Database dialog will show the point s receiver virtual receiver or alert unit s database values Show Areas If selected the lower section of the Transponder Database dialog will show the alarm area s database values Modifying existing transponder entry If the transponder is already defined in the Transponder Database the Edit Data button is used to complete or modify the data The data that can be modified is the same
264. re communication failure Therefore if communications fail with this transponder the area this transponder protects will not be protected and alarms from subscribers in that area will be missed without the operator s knowledge This checkbox should not be checked in a live system Clicking this button displays a new Edit Transponder s Database Record dialog window This is used to enter a new transponder to the database Clicking this button allows the currently displayed transponder s database record to be modified Clicking this button deletes the currently displayed transponder s database record If the transponder is killed its data is permanently deleted and cannot be recovered Clicking this button deletes the currently displayed point from the current transponder s database record If the point is deleted its data is permanently deleted and cannot be recovered Clicking this button copies the currently displayed transponder s database record into a new transponder record This allows similarly configured transponders to be programmed once then copied into a new record Note It is not possible to edit the Transponder ID itself If this should be necessary the Copy button can be used to produce another Transponder Database entry duplicating the first but with the Transponder ID blank The new Transponder ID can be entered the new data saved by using the Save button and the old transponder entry can be de
265. receiver Alert 1 TP A10 3 ji Bus 0 point5 E Bus Bus Alert 2 7 o Algorithm Defaut Alert3 gt Copy Floor level Basement5 Test A Paste Location sasd0 Save Map jo Cancel Figure 6 10 Assigning Alert Unit to Receiver Point Type i di Use the Floor Level drop down list box to assign the physical floor level where a receiver is mounted at The Location field contains the text to be displayed on the Alarm Screen if this receiver is one of those closest to the alarm source The description is developed with the guidance of the security personnel who must respond to an alarm It is vital that the description be clear and unambiguous to them To enter a location description place the cursor in the Location field click the mouse and begin typing Receiver and alert unit location names are important because they are used for directing response to an alarm and aid service personnel in identifying the device in the event of a problem The Problem Reports displayed on the central console and printed by the hardcopy printer contain the device location descriptions that are entered in the Location field 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Central Console computer setup and programming en 87 The Map field defines which bitmap to display for this receiver or area when an alarm is closest to it The default map is 0 which corresponds to bitma
266. rected before normal communications are restored Transmit Data Receive Data This LED flashes every time this transponder sends a message to the Central Console whether or not the Central Console receives it If this transponder initiated the communications and the Central Console correctly receives the message the Receive Data LED should flash soon after indicating the central station successfully returned an acknowledgement This LED flashes every time this transponder successfully receives a message addressed to it from the Central Console If the Central Console initiated the communications the Transmit Data LED should flash soon after indicating that this transponder is returning an acknowledgement CRC Error Test in Progress This LED comes on every time a message is received containing errors whether or not it was addressed to this transponder The LED remains on until the next message addressed to this transponder is received without error The most common cause for this LED to turn on is wiring errors Verify that the SE485 TX and TX are on a twisted pair Also verify that the SE485 RX and RX are on a twisted pair This LED comes on whenever a transmitter is tested It stays on for the duration of the test display typically 5 sec to 10 sec then it goes out If a test is received while another test is in progress the Test in Progress LED goes out momentarily then comes on for the duration of the second
267. reports Midnight Sunday Print report now report only Daily test report Low battery report Not testing report Receivers not heard from report Daily trouble report Guard tour report Guard tour exception report New alarm reports Fail to test letters Weekly subscriber test report Weekly security test report Weekly watchman test report Weekly maintenance test report D Subscriber Check in report E l Supervision Location Report E Figure 8 10 Print Export System Reports Dialog m D 5 Dm D m m z Daily test report Report of testing by classes of subscriber for the last 24 hours broken down by hour Low battery report Report of all subscriber transmitters currently reporting low battery Not testing report Report of all subscriber transmitters that have not tested their transmitters within the last 28 days Receivers not heard from Report of all receivers that have not heard transmissions report recently This could indicate a problem with the receiver s ability to hear alarms and test transmissions Daily trouble report Report of all the troubles currently being reported by transponders receivers and alert units Guard tour report Report of the guard tours collected within the last day This selection does not generate a printed report However the Midnight report and Sunday only checkboxes must be checked to write a file of the guard tour information Another application like Micro
268. responding Bus Enable jumper is in place and is off if the jumper is removed If the bus is enabled the LED flashes off and comes back on every time a receiver or alert module on that bus communicates with the transponder A Bus LED flashes at the rate of the heartbeat LED if there is any kind of bus fault data to ground data to power and bus power to ground on that bus On the EA501 the communications failure LED flashes at this rate since there is no Bus LED A Bus LED flashes at half the rate of the Heartbeat LED if there are no points reporting on that bus open connection On the EA501 the communications failure LED flashes at this rate If a Bus LED is flashing for a bus that is not enabled it can be reset in the Central Console s Transponder Data View dialog by selecting this transponder and clicking the Clear EE button There are two special displays on the Bus LEDs All the Bus LEDs go out and for 2 sec a single LED is on Walking down the display from bus 0 to bus 7 indicates that a battery test is in progress Usually after the tamper switch is released the bus LEDs count rapidly to indicate the EEPROM memory is being updated Verifying communications To verify communications press the test feature on any transmitter The Test in Progress LED comes on If it did not come on the receivers are not communicating with the transponder About a second after the Test in Progress LED comes on the Transmit Data LED flas
269. rms MV Points reporting alarm v Tests single line Tests including point info M Transmitter low battery M Operator activity log V Preference changes V Database backup and restore Figure 8 13 History Filter Dialog System menus and dialogs en TIGMIVIWIdadd9d TTIWa1iaa4 Save z mr EE er EE Select Which History Events Are To Be Out The Selected Destination Check to output the event Operator database changes Subscriber database changes Transponder data changes Spare 2 Report database changes Communications failure Transponder Communication Supervision monitor RF point troubles Transponder maps Receive level maps Database errors Transponder troubles Point Troubles Login changes Network communications Modem communications Analyze alarms Master computer switch Transponder data view Printer output 187 History screen Printer History archive file A History archive file B System serial port 1 System serial port 2 This option selects the events to be displayed on the computer screen when Show History is selected This option selects the events to be sent to the printer This option selects the events to be sent to the a_audit txt file stored in the Security Escort sub directory typically C ESCORT a_audit txt There is a minimum set of events that cannot be disabled so they are always recorded This option selects the events to be sent to the b_audit txt file store
270. roblems with the location using the Linear Algorithm The Enable Algorithm Tweaks checkbox must be checked for this to be displayed Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 118 en Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units Security Escort Low depth This setting controls the involvement of receivers in the alarm location calculation only when the Low Algorithm is being used The setting can range from O to 6 default is 2 When set to 0 only the receivers closer to the actual location of the alarm will be considered in the location calculation As the setting is raised more distant receivers will be included in the alarm calculation Typically lower settings are better than higher settings Change this setting if there are known problems with the location using the Low Algorithm The Enable Algorithm Tweaks checkbox must be checked for this to be displayed Medium depth This setting controls the involvement of receivers in the alarm location calculation only when the Medium Algorithm is being used The setting can range from O to 6 default is 2 When set to 0 only the receivers closer to the actual location of the alarm will be considered in the location calculation As the setting is raised more distant receivers will be included in the alarm calculation Typically lower settings are better than higher settings Change this setting if there are known probl
271. rocessing timers Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 218 en System menus and dialogs Security Escort niet s Version 2 15 0 1 May 13 2015 18 33 50 Free Disk Space Total Disk Space Serial number 275153 mb 305142 mb 459006585 Tick Time Idle Time Alarm Time Test Time Other Time Alarm Location Tick Passes Hour Idle Passes Hour Average Max 0 ms 0 ms 1 ms 47 ms 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms 543 0 270809 0 Users Transponders Receivers Alert Unit Workstations Figure 8 33 About Dialog Version Free Disk Space Total Disk Space Tick Time Idle Time Alarm Time Current Allowed 14 500 30 1920 2 9 1 0 Cancel At the top of the dialog the software version and the date and time that it was compiled is displayed This shows the free disk space on the C drive of this computer This shows the total disk space on the C drive of this computer The amount of time spent in the time tick processor per pass The amount of time spent In the idle time processor per pass The amount of time spent to process each alarm report from a transponder 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Test Time Other Time Alarm Location Tick Passes Hour Idle Passes Hour Serial number Maximum users Max transponders Max workstations Reset Max
272. ross bus wire Should be reading between 7 5 V DC to 10 5 V DC If voltage is not present or lower than 9 V check wiring BUS to BUS for possible ground short or open No power to receiver Check power for 10 5 V DC to 13 5 V DC If lower than 10 V DC or no voltage present check wiring PWR to PWR on power side of receiver repair or replace cable 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Symptoms Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en Probable Cause 105 Possible Solutions Close lightning hit Power down transponder AC and battery for 30 sec then turn power back on If bus failure does not clear probable cause would be bad bus on transponder Bad bus on transponder Remove cable from bus meter terminals with VOM If voltage is lower then 9 V DC on BUS or lower then 12 V DC on PWR replace transponder Table 7 4 EA500 transponder bus faults 7 3 5 EA102 receiver issues Symptoms Probable Cause Possible Solutions Single receiver not responding Address switch in wrong position Rotate switch to correspond with transponder database location Open on the bus wires Put meter across bus wire Should be reading between 7 5 V DC to 10 5 V DC If voltage is not present or lower than 9 V check wiring BUS to BUS for possible ground
273. rror pop ups 211 Show Areas 83 Show connection pop ups 211 Show History 186 Show maintenance levels 115 Show Map 186 Show personal data 121 Show Points 83 Show test levels 115 Show tests on the map 121 Silent 129 Site survey 26 General 23 Slave computer 73 Slave computer answers 73 Slave Database drive 180 Slave Database path 213 Slave s Network Address 211 Slave s Network Listen Port 211 Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 234 en Index Sound maintenance alarm 115 Sound unauthorized alarms 120 Spacing 202 Spare 195 Spare 2 188 State 130 Stop all pages 208 Stop test and reset counters 202 Strong depth 118 Strong pull algorithm 87 Subscriber advanced features dialog 135 Subscriber Check in report 184 Subscriber class names 123 Subscriber Database 125 135 146 153 155 Subscriber database changes 188 Subscriber Database editing 127 Subscriber ID 130 Subscriber image Extension 213 Subscriber image file path 213 Subscriber image Scaling 213 Subscriber images 132 Subscriber Type 129 Successful Incoming Messages 203 214 Successful pager messages 203 Sunday report 184 Supervise unauthorized 114 Supervision Duration 130 Supervision Location report 184 Supervision monitor 188 Supervision Monitors 204 Supervision period 139 Suppress Lanyard Alarm 121 Suppress Man Down Alarm 121 Synchronize system time 185 System block diagram 9
274. rs match you will also be allowed to change system parameters remotely For verification reenter the same password as above If selected this system serial port is disabled default If selected this system serial port sends out whatever items that are selected in the History Filter dialog If selected this system serial port sends out the strings programmed in the Video Switcher field of the Transponder Database Edit dialog s Area data Also see Video switcher restore field below If selected this system is controlled by another system through a proprietary protocol This setting can only be used when two systems are specifically designed to work together If selected system will send service pages via the local port If selected system will send security pages via the local port If selected system will send both service and security pages via the local port This string is transmitted on any system serial port programmed for Video switcher control when all alarms are restored This string is transmitted to the video switcher to reset it to the default displays Up to 20 characters can be entered Control characters can be entered as A for control A This is the initialization string transmitted to the modem to set it up for all communications except paging Normally this setting does not need to change To allow changes to this string hold down the lt Shift gt lt Ctrl gt keys when this dialog is first
275. ry Filter dialog under the Setup Menu After Show History is selected this menu item changes to Show Map File Utilities Logout Setup Printer Network About SCHEDULES exit by operator 4 11 42 13 AM Tue May 12 2015 ALARM GROUPS entered by operator 4 11 42 17 AM Tue May 12 2015 Wrote new workstation preferences file C escort wprefers edb Wrote new global preferences file C escort gprefers edb ALARM GROUPS exit by operator 4 11 42 25 AM Tue May 12 2015 SCHEDULES entered by operator 4 11 42 35 AM Tue May 12 2015 SCHEDULES exit by operator 4 11 42 44 AM Tue May 12 2015 ALARM GROUPS entered by operator 4 11 42 47 AM Tue May 12 2015 All points were restored when arming alarm group for alarm group 3 11 42 52 AM Tue May 12 2015 Wrote new workstation preferences file C escort wprefers edb Wrote new global preferences file C escort gprefers edb ALARM GROUPS exit by operator 4 11 42 52 AM Tue May 12 2015 SCHEDULES entered by operator 4 11 42 56 AM Tue May 12 2015 SCHEDULES exit by operator 4 11 43 40 AM Tue May 12 2015 ALARM GROUPS entered by operator 4 11 43 43 AM Tue May 12 2015 ALARM GROUPS exit by operator 4 11 44 05 AM Tue May 12 2015 ALARM GROUPS entered by operator 4 11 44 26 AM Tue May 12 2015 ALARM GROUPS exit by operator 4 11 45 28 AM Tue May 12 2015 ALARM GROUP STATE entered by operator 4 11 45 33 AM Tue May 12 2015 ALARM GROUP STATE exit by operator 4 11 45 54 AM Tue May 12 2015 S
276. scort program is delivered on a CD ROM Notice Exit all other programs before inserting the CD ROM An autorun feature should automatically start the installation program If not run SETUP EXE using one of the following methods 1 Double click the Computer icon on the desktop Select the Compact Disc X double click the INSTALL directory Double click the SETUP EXE icon X is the letter of the CD ROM drive 2 Goto Start gt Programs gt Windows Explorer In Windows Explorer select the Compact Disc X and double click the INSTALL directory Double click the SETUP EXE icon 3 Click Start gt Run Type X INSTALL SETUP EXE in the Open textbox and click the OK button X is the drive letter for the CD ROM drive Once SETUP EXE is running the following Welcome dialog appears Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Security Escort The InstallShield Wizard will install Security Escort on your computer To continue click Next Figure 5 1 Security Escort Setup Welcome Dialog You can click the Cancel button at any stage of installation to abort installation The Exit Setup dialog will appear Click the Yes button to abort installation 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Installation options en 61 Figure 5 2 Exit Setup Dialog Otherwise click the Next gt button The License Agreement dialog appears Please read the following li
277. scort system Subscriber Complete record of all subscriber data and current status low battery and last test date and time Transponders System configuration containing all installed equipment and system interrelationships Other Specifications Temperature range 0 C to 40 C 32 F to 105 F Primary power 120 V AC 900 W two computers two monitors and one printer Backup power 1200 VA UPS per computer will provide 45 minutes to one hour backup System should also be backed up by an emergency generator for extended blackouts can be shared with other emergency equipment Pager Pager support is included and selected troubles can be automatically sent to a service pager SE3 subscriber transmitter are Features Alerts Central Console of user s name and location immediately on alarm Post alarm tracking alarm map recall and more Allows user to test from anywhere within the protected area Internal antenna Four year battery life field replaceable Key chain attachment 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort System components specifications en 13 Low battery indication at Central Console Optional silent alarm Description The SE3 subscriber transmitter contains a unique code which is associated with the subscriber at the time the transmitter is assigned When the subscriber generates an alarm
278. sful Incoming Messages Incoming Format Errors Incoming Retried Messages Total Alarms Received Total Tests Received Total Troubles Processed pora aa ae eas are Total Troubles Shed Outgoing Retried Messages Outgoing Failed Messages Any data fields shown in yellow Current Troubles indicate a system problem I Auto scan Stress test Not Responding Map Out of Service Map Reset Transponder Troubles Jamming Map Tamper Map AC Loss Map Low Battery Map Previous Next Acknowledge Refresh Data Cancel Select the desired transponder Click the Reset Transponder Troubles button If the selected transponder is communicating with the Central Console the number 1 will appear in the Total Outgoing Messages and Successful Incoming Messages fields The transponder is now communicating with the Central Console software If the number 1 only appeared in the Total Outgoing Messages field there is a wiring problem between the Central Console and the transponder refer to Troubleshooting reference page 100 of this manual and locate the problem Check the Stress test checkbox This tests the communications reliability by causing the Central Console software to send a continuous stream of messages to the selected transponder The values in the Successful Incoming Messages and Total Outgoing Messages fields should start counting up rapidly with few if any errors It is normal to have slightly fewer Total Outgoing Me
279. soft Excel can sort and print the desired reports Guard tour exception The guard tour exception reports collected within the last day report Not currently implemented New alarm reports Alarm reports for all of the new alarms that have been received by the system Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 184 en System menus and dialogs 8 2 4 Fail to test letters Weekly subscriber test report Weekly security test report Weekly watchman test report Weekly maintenance test report Subscriber Check in report Security Escort Notices to all of the subscribers that have not tested within the last 28 days Not currently implemented Report of subscriber testing for the last 7 days broken down by hour Report of security personnel testing for the last 7 days broken down by hour Report of watchman personnel testing for the last 7 days broken down by hour Report of maintenance testing for the last 7 days broken down by hour Report of all subscribers that failed to check in during the last scheduled check in period Supervision Location report Report of all supervision enabled subscribers and their last Print Export Print report now Midnight report Sunday report Export Alarm Reports known location Clicking this button prints all reports that are checked in the left hand check boxes Clicking this button exports all reports that are checked in the left hand ch
280. ssages than Successful Incoming Messages If the errors are greater than 1 of the number of messages then there is a problem that should be corrected refer to Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units page 95 of this manual and locate the problem After the stress test runs any current troubles are displayed in the box in the Transponder current status window Correct any troubles at this time 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort 5 Central Console computer setup and programming en 93 From the Setup menu select Transponder communications The following dialog window appears Click Button To Send Desired Message Mapping Device Type Map VM OK Check Not Responding Map I M OK Release Control Received Trans Map Reset Transponder Jamming Map Transponder outputs Tamper Map Point Out of Service Restarted Dropped _Point Out of Service Point In Service Horn Siren Map Horn Siren Green LED Map me Strobe Red LED Map Strobe Red Led AC Loss Map Low Battery Map Off Output Command Out of Service Map On Output Command Transponder TP A10 3 Unlimited retries Previous Next None bus 0 point 0 fo a The history display shows only the selected Transponder s communications Select the desired transponder Then click the Not Responding Map
281. stallations and can be placed with confidence provided these installation requirements are met Therefore at the pre bid stage it is acceptable to estimate the required equipment To ensure proper coverage after proposal acceptance potential receiver locations can be verified using a standard receiver in test mode or the portable test receiver before construction begins Location accuracy The Security Escort system provides quick response to a duress call Its intent is to dispatch a responding individual to an area without additional delay to their response to that duress call Seas EET Figure 3 1 System Block Diagram The Security Escort system uses radio freguency RF for alarm transmissions This is significant because it prevents normal construction from blocking the signal and helps to eliminate dead spots where the alarm could not be heard The fact that RF energy passes through normal construction prevents Security Escort from locating an alarm with 100 certainty to a specific side of a wall Alarms originating at or near building walls will typically be indicated within 7 5 m 25 ft of the actual location However there may be times when the computed location may appear to be on the other side of the wall Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 24 en Equipment estimation location accuracy and receiver location Security Escort The Security Escort system was designed to provide a compu
282. systems components databases and maps You may choose which to install Click the Next gt button The Select Program Folder dialog appears for you to place the Security Escort shortcuts in the selected program folder 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Installation options en 65 Select Program Folder Please select a program folder Setup will add program icons to the Program Folder listed below You may type a new folder name or select one from the existing folders list Click Next to continue Program Folder Security Escort Existing Folders Administrative Tools Games Maintenance Startup Tablet PC InstallShield Figure 5 8 Select Program Folder Dialog We are set to install the program Click the Next gt button The installation starts displaying the progress status Installing C dotnet exe Figure 5 9 Installation Progress Dialog Once installation has completed the Installation Complete dialog appears Click the Finish button to finish the installation Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 66 en Installation options Security Escort InstallShield Wizard Complete Setup has finished installing Security Escort on your computer lt Back Finish Cancel Figure 5 10 Installation Complete Dialog To manually start the Security Escort program after installation go to Start g
283. t Programs gt Security Escort In a live system it is recommended that the Security Escort program be configured to automatically start To auto start the program place a shortcut to ESC32 EXE the Security Escort program typically located in C ESCORT in the following path C ProgramData Microsoft Windows Start Menu Programs Startup Security Escort Turning on Microsoft NET Framework feature After installing the Security Escort software you need to turn on the NET feature in order for the software to work Go to Start gt Control Panel gt Programs and Features 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Installation options en 67 eon OE f gt Control Panel gt Programs Programs and Features B Search Programs and Features Pp Control Panel Home Uninstall or change a program View installed updates Tur Windows features on or off To uninstall a program select it from the list and then click Uninstall Change or Repair Organize Uninstall Change a Name Publisher Installed On Size Version EA Adobe Acrobat Reader DC MUI E Intel R Network Connections Drivers Intel 2 4 2015 916KB 187 Mf Intel HD Graphics Driver Intel Corporation 4 27 2015 74 2MB 91710 2843 intel PROSet Wireless Software Intel Corporation 4 27 2015 251MB 171311 Mf Intel USB 3 0 eXtensible Host Controller Driver Intel Corporation 4 27 2015 184MB 109254 JE Lenovo Power
284. table move the Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 28 en Equipment estimation location accuracy and receiver location Security Escort 3 3 2 3 3 3 receivers update the receiver location in the Transponder Database and retest Do not test outside of the last receiver in any direction as this gives incorrect locations Repeat this test in all areas of different construction and concern at the site Indoor receiver installation Indoor receivers must be mounted in a evenly spaced grid no more than 25 m 80 ft apart Indoor receivers must be mounted 1 5 to 1 8 m 5 ft to 6 ft above the floor This is true even if this is a single story building Do not mount receivers above the ceiling or in roof rafters In multistory buildings the receivers must be mounted directly above the receivers on the floor below The same number of receivers must be used on each floor level If you meet all of the indoor installation guidelines you can expect the computed location to indicate the correct floor about 95 of the time Receivers must not be mounted within 30 cm 1 ft of any metal object including wire mesh metal foil metal pipe and HVAC ducting in walls Take care that large metal objects do not shield a receiver from a protected area For example metal staircases metal food serving lines metal walls lead lined walls metal roofs wire mesh in walls walk in freezers and refrigerators For
285. td Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Security Escort Transponder BUSO PARO oa pCR ON MO WO ON ON HO EO OE ON EO EO OE OE EO EO OE CON ON ON CON HO NO HO WO ON ON ON ON EE EO EO OE u ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON EO HO EO EI HO EO EO EO OE ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OE ON OE ON OE O Co MI HO NI EO HO EI HI EI EO HO EI EI EO EO HO EO EE MO HI EI EO HO EI HI EO EI KO EO EO HI EO EO EE m MO NO EO HI EO HOE EI EI EO EO EIE EO EO EO l l l B l 5 B B 8 B B j A a 2520 RBBB BUA 254H RBBB BB 25500 008008 Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd en System wiring 38 SHSQSSSRSRRRSRRASESS SFSP285 8 OE e OE OE ONE OO OOS OO OO OO Oe co ON MO ON SO ON EO ON SO OE SO OE SO ON ES OE SO OE MO ON HO ON EO ON EO ON SO OE EO ONE OE EO aan ON OE HO EO OE ON EO EO OE OE HO EO OE ON MO HO ON ON HO EO OE ON EO EO OE OE EE OOM OM ON ON MO EI HO EO ON ON OE OE HO EO HO EI OE ON OE OE EI EO EI EO OE OE OE OE EE O O Mu OM ON ON ON ON ON ON ON EI HO EO EO EI EI EO EO OE ON ON ON ON ON ON OE EE EIE EI EE EIE z OE OE OE OCE OE CE ON ON CE CON CE ON ON OCE OE OCE EO BOEDO EDO HO EO EO EI EI IO EO EO EE O yn T OM OM OM OM ON ON OM OM ON ON CE CE ON ON OO OE OE OE OO OE EE OE OE ONE N MI MO MI EI MO EI MO EI EI EO EI EO HI EI EO EIE WIE EO EIE EI EI EI EI EO EI EE EE o MI At HO EI EI EI EO EO EO EO EI EI EI EIE WO EI EI EIE EO EO EI EI EI EI EO EO EO EE 5 PRSARRSRRRRRERRRRREREEERERRERANS
286. ted alarm location typically within 7 5 m 25 ft of the actual location when indoors and a computed alarm location typically within 15 m 50 ft of the actual location outdoors Any deviation from the following installation guidelines will degrade the computed location accuracy Therefore to achieve accuracy the following installation guidelines must be adhered to 3 2 Pre bid equipment estimation The pre bid equipment estimation is performed prior to bidding the installation At this point it must be determined what type of coverage is desired and where the coverage will be required For example the amount of equipment required for a full coverage indoor and outdoor system in a multi building application is greater than an installation that requires outdoor only coverage The customer should be consulted and the areas of most concern should be given special consideration 3 2 1 Initial equipment estimate Number of indoor receivers To estimate the number of indoor receivers assume the receivers will be placed on a grid with a maximum spacing of 25 m 80 ft between receivers for standard construction In multi floor applications the receivers on each floor must be placed directly above the receivers on the floor below this is required for proper floor to floor location To estimate the number of indoor receivers first read Indoor receiver installation Assume the receivers are placed on a grid with a maximum spacing of 25 m 80 ft betw
287. ted to any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose unless stated otherwise in writing Please see the full text of the relevant software licenses for further details The Bosch standard product warranty only applies to the combination of hardware and software as delivered by Bosch Without prejudice to any licensee s right to apply the provisions of a relevant software license any modification of any software delivered with or as part of the product may render any warranty on the whole product or any parts thereof null and void and Bosch is entitled to charge fees for any services in relation thereto Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 226 en Index Index Symbols se t 85 Security Escort A Abort setup for this MUX point 200 About dialog 217 About menu 215 AC loss 192 193 Acknowledge 145 146 Acknowledge subscriber type 129 Add 142 Address 130 Advanced 131 Alarm 116 maintenance 174 Alarm area setup 90 Alarm Background Color 130 Alarm differential 195 Alarm group 139 Alarm group 144 Alarm group name 144 Alarm Group State dialog 145 Alarm Groups dialog 144 Alarm Location 219 Alarm map 170 Alarm min level 195 Alarm on open loop 138 Alarm on shorted loop 138 Alarm report incomplete 172 Alarm Reports Database 168 Alarm spot size 117 Alarm Time 218 Alarm type definitions 124 Alarm voice output 121 Alarm when armed troubl
288. ter automatically populates the master s IP address in the Slave s Network Address textbox and the master s network port in the Slave s Network Listen Port textbox If the computer has more than one network interface card NIC you must verify that the correct IP address was selected by comparing this address to the IP address that was programmed in the Control Panel TCP IP protocol If the address is not correct manually enter the correct IP address The Security Escort will be listening on this port to communicate with the OPC server A separate OPC server is created to communicate between the OPC client and the Security Escort system The OPC server holds the alarm and trouble messages and sends the same to the available client once it is connected The OPC server will send the status of the Security Escort to the OPC client The OPC sever also acknowledges and deletes alarm and trouble messages from OPC client If the connection between OPC server and Security Escort goes down the OPC server will try to reconnect with Security Escort Once the connection to the Security Escort becomes active the Security Escort will send all the available alarms to the OPC server The OPC server in turn sends the alarm back to OPC client hence the OPC client may display some duplicate alarms The path that this slave or workstation computer uses to access the shared database files on the master computer This path may have a different drive lett
289. ter will have to be activated once each day during the Check in Schedule time At the end of the check in period if the subscriber fails to check in a Failed to Check in Report will be generated and presented to the operator of the software This report contains all of the people who failed to check in with their first address line and phone number All subscribers in the report must be checked on to make sure they are not in need of assistance as this may be a life treating situation A printed report may also be generated If the transmitter is not a point type then the transmitter can generate alarms and therefore a test transmission will be used for the check in If the transmitter is a point type then any non trouble transmission will serve as a check in One of the 10 schedules must be selected as the check in schedule to define the check in period Done Click this button when all changes to this dialog are completed and return the main Subscriber Database edit dialog 7 11 Schedules dialog This selection informs management of the ten time of day day of week schedules and holidays The top portion of the display shows the ten time of day day of week schedules that Security Escort supports For each schedule there is an indication the schedule is currently active or armed ACT otherwise the schedule is disarmed OFF fe sere waas Te ry Arm Time Disarm Time Schedule Art Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesda 08 00
290. ters None MaxLength 256 Input Time Out 1 XON XOFF Recognition Disabled DSR Generation Disabled Radio Speed 121 Kbaud Broadcast Address 1 Lost Communication Continue Type Filter Directed ProxLink radio module configuration for the transponders p These numbers must match ProxLink radio module configuration for the central station N 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort 5 2 5 3 Installation options en 59 Installation options Demo installations When the software is used for demo purposes it is limited to ten records in the Subscriber Database one transponder in the Transponder Database and only receivers 0 through 3 on bus O can be defined for that transponder no other points can be programmed for that transponder If these limitations are observed the software will communicate with the single transponder and the system can be used with full functionality for demo purposes Refer to the Installing the Security Escort software section of to install the software After the software has been installed do not run it Double click the HDD32 EXE file in the Security Escort directory C ESCORT This will install the driver for the software key This is required even for demo installations that will not have the software key If the HDD32 EXE installer is not run before the Security Escort software is run the first time t
291. the procedure to upgrade an This program is 32 bit and is designed to run under Windows XP Windows 7 8 1 32 64 bi THEY Security Escort files NET InstallShield Figure 5 4 Readme Information Dialog Read the entire file before proceeding use the scroll bar on the right side to see the portion not currently displayed Once done click the Next gt button The Choose Destination Location dialog appears Select the location on the hard disk drive to install the Security Escort program Typically the default location would be ideal C ESCORT 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Installation options en 63 Choose Destination Location Select folder where setup will install files Setup will install Security Escort in the following folder To install to this folder click Next To install to a different folder click Browse and select another folder Destination Folder C Escort InstallShield Figure 5 5 Choose Destination Location Dialog If you wishes to install the program in a different location click the Browse button and the Choose Folder dialog to appears Select the desired folder and click the OK button You will return to the Choose Destination Folder dialog Please select the installation folder Path a amp Local Disk C gt J DRIVERS di Escort gt inetpub gt d Intel gt Ji Perflogs gt Program Files
292. the queue was in use This value is the maximum number of bytes received from transponders on this serial port but not yet processed by the system If displayed in yellow more than 50 of the queue was in use This value is the maximum number of bytes processed by the system but not yet transmitted to the transponders on this serial port If displayed in yellow more than 50 of the queue was in use This is the number of times a byte was lost by the hardware for a serial port because it was not fast enough to process the byte into the input buffer This is the number of times a byte was lost by the software for a serial port because the input buffer overflowed Bytes were placed into the input buffer faster than the system could process them This is a measure of the amount of time peak traffic on this serial port was greater than the system s ability to handle it The system automatically sheds non essential tasks when this value rises This is a measure of the number of times peak traffic on this serial port was greater than the system s ability to handle it The system automatically sheds non essential tasks when this value rises Clicking this button resets all values in this shown in this dialog Clicking this button refreshes all values shown in this dialog The values are not automatically updated when the dialog is left open Clicking this button closes the dialog window This dialog sets up remote pager access f
293. the reported location draw an arrow on the map from the actual location to the reported location Press the up arrow once to go to the next alarm Compare the locations drawing an arrow to the reported location if they differ Repeat this procedure for all points on your map making sure that the points on the map stop when you run out of entries in the scrolling list on the computer screen Otherwise the points on the map and the screen are out of sync and the errors on your map are incorrect and misleading For areas where there were alarm location problems you may want to repeat the process above facing different directions from the same spot This generates additional alarms from different spots in the problem areas to fully understand the extent of the problem You should also generate alarms in areas adjacent to the area with the problem to see if they are also affected Using a maintenance transmitter with two people 1 The two people must have radio contact between them One person operates the computer running the Security Escort software and the other takes the maintenance transmitter to the area to be tested At the computer select menu File gt Maintenance Alarm Database Make sure the top item in the scrolling list is selected Press the alarm on the transmitter and remain at the spot where you transmitted At the computer observe the alarm and accurately describe the computed location over the radio The individual with the tr
294. this port This value is number of outgoing messages that were retried because the receiving application did not acknowledge them If displayed in yellow this value is more than 1 5 of the Total Outgoing Messages This value is maximum number of bytes received on this serial port but not yet processed by the system If displayed in yellow more than 50 of the queue was in use This value is maximum number of bytes processed by the system but not yet transmitted on this serial port If displayed in yellow more than 50 of the queue was in use This is the number of times a byte was lost by the software for a serial port because the input buffer overflowed Bytes were placed into the input buffer faster than the system could process them This is the number of times a byte was lost by the hardware for a serial port because it was not fast enough to process the byte into the input buffer This value is the total number of times a remote access connection was successful This value is the number of times a remote access connection was attempted and rejected because a valid remote access code was not received This is the time and date of the last successful remote access attempt This value is the number of successful pager messages sent This value is the number of times a pager message dial out was unsuccessful Clicking this button resets all values shown in this dialog Clicking this button refreshes all values sho
295. this code is sent to the Central Console The Central Console graphically displays the subscriber s location on a map along with the subscriber s picture his or her name and address Transmitting an alarm In the event of an emergency the user simply presses and holds the alarm buttons to produce an alarm Depending on the installed options when an alarm is generated within approximately two seconds the sounders in any nearby receivers will be activated as well as the strobes and sirens connected to nearby alert units The alarm signal is transmitted to the receivers which in turn relay the alarm signal to the transponder and along to the Central Console The Central Console then graphically displays the subscriber s location along with the subscriber s name vital information such as a medical condition or disability and a picture of the subscriber Also once an alarm is initiated the transmitter commences its auto tracking feature Auto tracking During an alarm the transmitter automatically resends the alarm signal every few seconds constantly updating the Central Console of the subscriber s location Testing The test mode allows a subscriber to test their transmitter anywhere in the protected area When the user is indoors in sight of an indoor receiver or outdoors in sight of a strobe pressing the buttons in sequence performs a test If the test is successful a small green light will flash on the indoor recei
296. ting transponder entry 83 Setting receiver parameters 83 Alarm area setup 90 Powering up the system for the first time 91 Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units 95 Common errors 95 Built in troubleshooting aids 95 Receiver 95 Transponder 97 Troubleshooting reference 100 Transponder communication with SE485 bus 100 Transponder communication with ProxLink 101 Transponder communication with Moxa Lantronix device 103 EA500 transponder bus faults 104 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort 7 3 5 7 4 Go 5 2 1 0 2 7 6 TE 7 8 7 9 7 10 7 10 1 7 10 2 7 10 3 7 10 4 7 10 5 7 10 6 7 10 7 7 11 CATA A112 7 11 3 7 11 4 11 5 LALO T12 7 12 1 17 12 2 7 12 3 7 12 4 7 13 7 13 1 13 2 7 13 3 7 14 7 14 1 7 14 2 7 15 7 15 1 715 2 7 15 3 7 15 4 7 15 5 7 15 6 TLD 7 16 7 16 1 7 16 2 8 8 1 Table of Contents en 5 EA102 receiver issues 105 Receiver configuration dialog 108 Post construction setup 110 Testing the location accuracy of an installation 110 Improving the location accuracy of an installation 112 System preferences dialog 113 Security Preferences dialog 118 System Defaults dialog 123 System Labels dialog 124 Subscriber Database 125 Print Subscriber Database 126 Edit Subscriber Database record 127 Additional subscriber information 131 Subscriber images 132 Fixed Location Transmitters 133 Subscriber individual Pager
297. ton takes you to the next higher alarm group from the one currently displayed It will not wrap around Therefore it will be disabled at alarm group 99 Last Clicking this button takes you to alarm group 99 Alarm Group State dialog This dialog will display a list of the alarm groups that are currently armed and have one or more transmitters points faulted The points are presented because they were not restored when their automatic schedule armed or there was an alarm while the alarm group was on J Name Location Figure 7 21 Alarm Group State Dialog Print Report Clicking this button prints the displayed data to the report printer Acknowledge Clicking this button closes the dialog if it was selected from the menu However if the dialog was presented automatically at the arm time of an alarm group s automatic schedule because they were not restored or there was an alarm while the alarm group was on then you are required to enter your password to acknowledge the dialog and remove it from this computer s and all other computer workstations screens Current Check in Status dialog This dialog displays a list of subscribers that are required to check in and failed to do so during the last check in period Also shown are their addresses phone numbers and the last time they checked in Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 146 en Troubleshooting transponders
298. transmitter is assigned to is disarmed then a shorted loop on this transmitter will cause a trouble report to be displayed If no alarm group is assigned the transmitter is always armed For this option to be enabled the transmitter s class must be set to Point type If selected an open loop on this transmitter will not cause an alarm or trouble report to be displayed For this option to be enabled the transmitter s class must be set to Point type If selected and the alarm group where this transmitter is assigned to is armed then an open loop on this transmitter will cause an alarm report to be displayed The alarm group where this transmitter is assigned to must be armed for this input to cause an alarm which is displayed If no alarm group is assigned the transmitter is always armed For this option to be enabled the transmitter s class must be set to Point type If selected an open loop on this transmitter will cause a trouble report to be displayed For this option to be enabled the transmitter s class must be set to Point type If selected and the alarm group where this transmitter is assigned to is armed then an open loop on this transmitter will cause an alarm report to be displayed If selected and the alarm group where this transmitter is assigned to is disarmed then an open loop on this transmitter will cause a trouble report to be displayed If no alarm group is assigned the trans
299. tup dialog 70 Remote computer 73 Remote Control Listening Port 212 Remote key activation 192 Remote key tamper 192 Remote setup dialog 72 Remote system control 74 Remove gt gt 142 Report End of shift reminder for 122 trouble filtering 190 Report database changes 188 Reports Database 168 Require alarm report 121 Requires check in 140 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Requires restore 139 Reset 126 Reset Max 219 Reset point 199 Reset Status 203 205 215 Reset to Default 195 Restore database 180 Restore to disk cartridge path 213 Revision 199 RF micro revision 198 RF point troubles 188 Run buddy check 114 Run silent 194 Run test 202 Index en 233 S SA 88 Save 90 131 Save EE 196 Scaling 213 Schedules dialog 140 SE485 interface adapter troubleshooting 100 Security alarms silent 121 Security pager 207 Security Pager Confm Not Read 207 Security preferences 118 Security Preferences dialog 139 Select Point dialog 84 Send all other alarms 207 Send change 195 Send installer demo alarms 207 Send page a second time 2 minute delay 207 Send pager message dialog 207 Send Security 208 Send Service 208 Send to group 208 Sensitivity adjust 88 Serial number 219 service pager 206 Setup Type dialog 64 Shift reminder 122 Shorted loop alarm 138 Shorted loop disable 137 Shorted loop trouble 138 Show all e
300. understand the extent of the problem You should generate alarms in areas adjacent to the area with the problem to see if they are also affected Using a maintenance transmitter with only one person 1 The Security Escort software retains the last 50 maintenance alarm locations Make sure you are the only one using a maintenance transmitter on site buddy check is off and that you limit yourself to a maximum of 50 maintenance alarms per sequence Synchronize the time on your watch to the computer Carry a detailed map or floor plan of the area to be tested that you can write on Take the maintenance transmitter to the area to be tested Press the alarm on the transmitter and accurately mark the spot on the map where you transmitted with a 1 for the first transmission Also record the time of the first transmission only Continue to the next location transmit and mark that spot on the map with a 2 Repeat the process throughout the area to be tested being sure not to exceed 50 alarm transmissions and making sure that at least 10 sec elapse between transmissions When finished return to the computer and select menu File gt Maintenance Alarm Database Scroll through the alarm list to find the alarm that matches the time of your first transmission This is the maintenance alarm that you marked as 1 on your map Confirm that the actual location from the map matches the reported location If the actual location differs from
301. unds the test beep receiver 2 is within range Repeat this test until receiver 1 no longer sounds the test beeps Move back to the last location where receiver 1 received the test beeps This location marks the maximum spacing between receivers The distance between receivers should not exceed 25 m 80 ft indoors and 90 m 300 ft outdoors Mount receiver 2 at this location or closer to receiver 1 Notice Do not use the test mode jumper P4 to determine receiver spacing Wi 2 Figure 3 3 Receiver Spacing lil iil 1 Receiver 1 stops sounding the test 3 Receiver 2 at maximum range beeps when receiver 2 is moved past this point 2 Receiver 1 4 Receiver 2 beyond maximum range Using a transponder receivers and laptop computer to determine receiver location Notice System software and an area map must be installed on a laptop computer to use this method A transponder with long multiplex wires connected to receivers can be used to see actual alarm location before the receivers are placed Place the receivers in the proposed locations wired back to the transponder Program the receivers with their locations in the Transponder Database Using the maintenance transmitter and the maintenance alarm database activate alarm transmissions within the area surrounded by the temporarily placed receivers Verify that the location accuracy is acceptable at all points of concern If not accep
302. ur computer serial port connection Do not use null modem cable or cable marked for printer Bad SE485 Module Replace SE485 Module Using third party RS 485 interface Due to changes made for transient protection transformer isolation and link busy detection these signals are not compatible with third party RS 485 Interfaces Replace with SE485 High communications error count Wire between SE485 and transponder incorrectly installed Check to make sure transmit from transponder goes to receive of SE485 and receive from transponder goes to transmit on SE485 RX to TX RX to DE 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort 7 3 2 Symptoms Troubleshooting transponders points receivers and alert units en 101 Probable Cause Possible Solutions Wrong wire type Wire type must be twisted pair Single transponder in communication failure Transponder not on Check power switch Wrong transponder address Check DIP switch setting on transponder to correspond with your transponder data base setting RS 232 SE485 switch position Check slide switch on transponder to make sure it is in the SE485 position SE485 wiring on transponder Check to make sure transmit from transponder goes to receive of SE485 and receive from transponder goes to transmit on SE485 RX to TX RX to DE
303. ust be AWG SE485 twisted pair Wiring table not shielded CAT5 cable preferred Siren Strobe 4 1 2 mm 4 15 m 50 ft Solid not 18 twisted not AWG shielded Alert Unit Transformer 5 1 5 mm 2 15 m 50 ft Standard 16 lamp cord AWG Siren Strobe 6 1 5 mm 4 15 m 50 ft Solid not 18 twisted not AWG shielded Table 4 1 Wiring Guidelines Transponder SE485 wiring table Number of Maximum Wire Transponders Length 1to4 6100 m 20000 ft 8 3050 m 10000 ft 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort System wiring en 31 Number of Maximum Wire Transponders Length 12 1525 m 5000 ft 16 900 m 3000 ft Table 4 2 Transponder SE485 Wiring Table 4 1 2 Observe established standards Install cable according to local code requirements In the USA refer to the National Electrical Code Standards located in Chapter 8 Article 800 of the National Electrical Code and applicable local and regional codes 4 2 Component wiring guidelines 4 2 1 General wiring diagram Alert Unit Outdoor Receiver Sirer Strobe Outdoor Receiver Outdoor Indoor i A Receiver Receiver Indoor Indoor Receiver Receiver Siren Strobe f i f Indoor ProxLink ProxLink Receiver Transponder Transponder ProxLink Transponder Transponder SE485 Interfa
304. ver or the strobe will flash briefly There will be no response at all if the test fails If the test fails the user should contact the Security office as soon as possible Every successful test is recorded in the Subscriber Database in the Central Console software and optionally printed on the hardcopy printer The Subscriber Database contains all of the information relating to each subscriber including the date and time of the most recent test transmission It is possible to search the Subscriber Database for individuals who have not performed tests for a specified period of time Low battery reporting When the transmitter is tested a special low battery message is included in the transmission to the Central Console if the transmitter s battery is in need of replacing Also the system will not give a visual or audible response during a test indicating that the transmitter requires service Low battery alerts are logged at the Central Console Available models There are two SE3 models available User transmitter This is the standard transmitter used by all system subscribers Security transmitter This is the same as the standard transmitter except the transmitter does not emit an audible tone when activated This transmitter is normally distributed to Security personnel Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 14 en System components specifications Security Escort 2 3 SE2
305. when creating a new transponder entry see Creating a new transponder entry page 82 Setting receiver parameters Create or modify the receivers of the transponder using the features of the Point or Area Data For configuring Area Data refer to the Alarm area setup section The sections below explain how to configure the receiver points for the transponder Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 84 en Central Console computer setup and programming Security Escort Entering point number Each receiver and alert unit connected to the transponder has a unigue Point Number assigned during the system design process This Point Number ranges from O to 63 and corresponds to a specific bus number and point multiplex address number The multiplex address set by means of switches on the device receiver or alert unit itself must correspond with the Point Number assigned in the Transponder Database There is a one to one relationship between the Point Number and the combination of Multiplex Point Address Bus Number pair For example a device programmed with Multiplex Point Address location 3 on Bus Number 5 would correspond to the Point Number 29 Clicking the button to the right of the Point Number text box opens a dialog window displaying the Point Number in a table Clicking on any Point Number in the table automatically closes this window and fills the number in the Point Number field on the Transpo
306. wn in this dialog The values are not automatically updated when the dialog is left open Clicking this button closes the dialog window Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 204 en System menus and dialogs 8 3 9 System status dialog Security Escort This dialog shows the status of internal system queues and communications on the serial ports assigned to transponders p Current System and Transponder Serial Port Status ET Maximum Retry Messages Maximum Alarm Messages Maximum Trouble Messages Max Low Battery Messages Max Test Strobe Messages Max Man Down Messages Supervision Monitors ml ol leolslslTm Max Receive Max Transmit Hardware Overrun Buffer Overflow Overload Level Overload Count Reset Status Serial PortA PortB PortC PotD PortE PortF PortG PortH Port PortJ PortK PortL i sa s Max Spooler Bytes 0 Max Report Spooler Bytes 0 Any data fields shown in yellow indicate a system problem Figure 8 22 System Status Dialog Maximum Retry Messages Maximum Alarm Messages Maximum Trouble Messages Max Low Battery Messages Max Test Strobe Messages Max Man Down Messages Supervision Monitors Max Spooler Bytes This value is maximum number of messages in queue to be sent to all transponders in the system and were not yet acknowledged If displayed in yellow more than 50 of the queue was in use at this value This value
307. y can be set to graphically display received signal levels maintenance alarms are very useful to verify that the system coverage exists at any location in the protected area and that receiver redundancy is adequate 8 1 3 Transmitter Change The Transmitter Change command on the File menu is used when it is necessary to change a subscriber s transmitter Selecting Transmitter Change opens the Locate Subscriber s Database Record dialog The subscriber s record in the Subscriber Database can be quickly found by entering the Subscriber Name Subscriber ID current Transmitter ID Address Items Phone Number Pager Items or Pager Group This method of locating a particular subscriber s record is identical to using the Locate Key button in the Subscriber Database the first record which is identical to the entered data is shown It may be necessary to scroll using the Previous and Next buttons to find the appropriate record Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 176 en System menus and dialogs Security Escort Locate Subscriber s Data Subscriber Name PO Subscriber ID ssid Transmitter ID Address Items ma Phone Number NN Info Field Search Pager Items Pager Group Test near the receiver closest to this system to automatically fill in the Transmitter ID field Cancel Figure 8 4 Locate Subscriber s Database Record Perform a test using the old transmitter i
308. ystem capabilities perfect for campus and community environments Emphasis on reliability Supported by a multi million dollar company Extensive field testing under maximum abuse conditions from 20 F to 120 F Supervised system communication Low battery user and system operator notification Archived retrieval of system activity Patented technology Post alarm transmitter tracking System wide backup power feature System applications Student Safety Officer Tracking Guard Tour Employee Faculty Security VIP Protection Executive Protection Man Down Asset Tracking Some example installations Educational Facilities Florida Southern FL Oswego State NY Nazareth College NY Healthcare Facilities New Hanover Medical Center NC Provo Psychiatric Hospital Utah Fairport Retirement Home NY Correctional Facilities Westchester County D O C Valhalla NY Immigration amp Naturalization Facility TX US Naval Brig SC Other Diamond Mines South Africa Amusement Park FL International Art Museum NY Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Training Manual 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC 8 en System overview 1 5 1 6 Security Escort Other system applications Hotels amp Casinos Amusement Parks Commercial Complexes Buildings Parking Lots Garages Museums Financial Institutions Child Care Facilities Security Escort features The Security Escort System is engineered to provide reliability
309. ystem clock changed by the user and application will not work properly due to CRC Error Restart the application 02 50 39 PM Tue May 12 2015 ALARM GROUP STATE entered by operator 4 02 51 06 PM Tue May 12 2015 ALARM GROUP STATE exit by operator 4 02 51 16 PM Tue May 12 2015 CURRENT CHECK IN STATE entered by operator 4 02 51 50 PM Tue May 12 2015 CURRENT CHECK IN STATE exit by operator 4 02 52 22 PM Tue May 12 2015 CURRENT CHECK IN STATE entered by operator 4 02 52 28 PM Tue May 12 2015 CURRENT CHECK IN STATE exit by operator 4 02 52 33 PM Tue May 12 2015 Figure 8 12 Show History Log 8 3 2 History Filter Dialog This dialog selects the classes of events recorded for sent to specific output devices From the Select Destination group select the History screen Printer History files or System serial ports option Notice that when this selection is changed the checked items also change There is a different set of events output for each destination selected For each destination the events must be individually configured 2015 05 V2 15 0 DOC Training Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Security Escort Select destination History screen C Printer C History archive file A C History archive file B C System serial port 1 C System serial port 2 Transponder restriction No restriction Only from transponder selected C All from transponder selected Check to output the event MV Ala

Security Escort 2.15 Training Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents